HP Hewlett Packard Printer 1200c User Manual

PCL 5 Comparison Guide

for the

HP LaserJet III

HP LaserJet IIID

HP LaserJet IIISi

HP LaserJet IIIP

HP LaserJet 4 Family

HP LaserJet 4000 series

HP Color LaserJet

HP Color LaserJet 5/5M

HP LaserJet 5 Family

HP LaserJet 6 Family

HP DeskJet 1200C

HP DeskJet 1600C

Printers

Edition 1

E1097

HP Part No. 5021-0378

Printed in U.S.A. 10/97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printing

Information

This manual was created using text formatting software on

a personal computer. The camera-ready copy was printed

direct to film and reproduced using standard offset printing.

Trademark Credits

Intellifont is a U.S. registered trademark of Agfa Division,

Miles Incorporated. CG Times is a product of Agfa

Corporation, AGFA Compugraphic Division. LaserJ et, PCL,

DeskJ et, Vectra, and Resolution Enhancement are U.S.

registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company. IBM

is a registered trademark of International Business

Machines Corporation. Wingdings, MS-Mincho, and

MS-Gothic are trademarks, and Microsoft, Windows, and

MS-DOS are U.S. registered trademarks of Microsoft

Corporation. Centronics is a U.S. registered trademark of

Centronics Corporation. ITC Zapf Dingbats is a U.S.

registered trademark of International Typeface Corpora-

tion. Helvetica and Times Roman are trademarks of

Linotype AG and its subsidiaries.

Univers is a U.S. registered trademark of Linotype AG and

its subsidiaries. PostScript and the PostScript logo are

registered trademarks of Adobe Systems, Inc. in the U.S.

and other countries. Arial, Times New Roman and

Monotype are U.S. registered trademarks of Monotype

Corporation plc. Macintosh is a registered trademark and

TrueType is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc. ESC/ P is

a trademark of Seiko-Epson Corporation.

iii

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conventions

This manual uses the following conventions:

Bold indicates a term defined in the glossary.

Italic refers to a related document, or is used for

emphasis.

The cursive letter l is used in some examples to

distinguish the letter “l” from the numeral “1” (one).

A slash zero 0 is used in some examples and escape

sequences to distinguish the letter “O” from the number

“0”.

0x XX represents a hexadecimal number (XX).

The ~ character indicates that the current line of code is

a continuation of the previous line.

Note

Notes contain important information set off from the text.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents

1 P r in ter F ea tu r es

PCL Feature Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3

PCL 5 Technical Reference Manual Corrections . . . . . . . 1-5

PCL Feature Support Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6

Printable Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26

2 P r in ter -Sp ecific Differ en ces

HP LaserJ et III and IIID Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

HP LaserJ et IIISi Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

HP LaserJ et IIIP Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Raster Graphics Adaptive Compression (IIIP) . . . . . . . 2-4

HP LaserJ et 4 Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4

Configuration Command (AppleTalk) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

HP LaserJ et 4Si Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

HP LaserJ et 4L Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11

HP LaserJ et 4ML Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

Logical Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13

Logical Operations and Transparency Interactions . . . . 2-15

Logical Operation Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17

Pixel Placement Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-25

Pixel Placement Command (HP-GL/2) . . . . . . . . . . . 2-28

Merge Control Command (HP-GL/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-29

HP LaserJ et 4P and 4MP Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31

HP LaserJ et 4PJ Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32

Text Parsing Method Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-33

Character Text Path Direction Command . . . . . . . . . 2-34

Font Header Format 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

New Font Format Header Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Description of Font Header Segments . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37

HP LaserJ et 4PJ Programming Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49

Paper Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

HP LaserJ et 4 Plus and 4M Plus Printers . . . . . . . . . . 2-60

HP LaserJ et 4V and 4MV Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-62

Font Header Format 16 Bitmap Font Support . . . . . . . . 2-63

Font Header Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63

Character Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-68

Limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-69

HP Color LaserJ et Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-70

AppleTalk Configuration Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71

HP LaserJ et 4LJ Pro Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

HP LaserJ et 4LC Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72

HP LaserJ et 5P and 5MP Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-73

HP LaserJ et 5L Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-74

HP LaserJ et 5Si and 5SiMx Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-75

Paper (Media) Source Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-76

Output Bin Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-78

Alphanumeric ID Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-79

HP DeskJ et 1200C Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-85

Updated Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-86

Enter HP-GL/2 Mode Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-87

Media Type Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-88

Print Quality Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-89

Negative Motion Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-90

HP DeskJ et 1600C Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-91

HP LaserJ et 5 and 5M Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97

Text Parsing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-97

Two-Byte HP-GL/2 Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98

Label Mode Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-98

Contents-2

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Writing with Proportional Fonts . . . . . . . . . 2-101

HP Color LaserJ et 5 and 5M Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-103

HP LaserJ et 6P/ 6MP Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105

HP LaserJ et 5Si Mopier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-105

HP LaserJ et 6L Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106

HP LaserJ et 4000 series Printers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-106

3 In ter n a l Typ efa ces/F on ts a n d Sym bol Set s

Bitmap Fonts and Symbol Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Scalable Typefaces and Symbol Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3

Typeface Selection Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12

4 P r in t En vir on m en t

5 Mem or y Usa ge

Operation of ADC and MEt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Image Adapt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Additional MEt Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

ADC and MEt Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

Recommendations For Sending Data to the Printer . . . . 5-4

Raster Graphics Adaptive Compression (Method 5) . . . . . 5-7

A P r in ter Com m a n d s

B In ter n a l Sym bol Set Ch a r t s

ISO Substitution Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-21

Conversion Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-22

C Sym bol Set a n d Typ efa ce Cod es

D MSL/Un icod e Sym bol In d exes

In d ex

Contents-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Contents-4

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Features

Introduction

Hewlett-Packard printers which support the PCL 5 printer

language contain slightly different feature sets, each

suitable for that printer ’s intended use. Each printer

implements minor variations of PCL 5 as a result of those

differences. With new printer releases, new features may be

added with new commands and/or PCL operations which

require documentation.

The purpose of this guide is to identify the differences in

the implementation of the PCL 5 Printer Language for

different HP LaserJ et and DeskJ et printers, as compared to

that described in the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical

Reference Manual. This guide describes new commands and

exceptions to existing commands unique to the printers, as

well as internal typeface/font support and print

environment settings.

Feature Set 1-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

This guide covers the following HP LaserJ et printers:

In tr od u ction Da te

LaserJ et III

March 1990

LaserJ et IIID

September 1990

February 1991

May 1991

LaserJ et IIISi

LaserJ et IIIP

LaserJ et 4, 4M

LaserJ et 4Si, 4SiMx

LaserJ et 4L, 4ML

LaserJ et 4P, 4MP

LaserJ et 4 Plus, 4M Plus

LaserJ et 4PJ

October 1992

April 1993

May 1993

September 1993

May 1994

LaserJ et 4V, 4MV

DeskJ et 1200C

DeskJ et 1200/PS

Color LaserJ et

September 1994

May 1993

September 1994

March 1995

May 1995

LaserJ et 4LC

DeskJ et 1600C

LaserJ et 4LJ Pro

LaserJ et 5P, 5MP

LaserJ et 5L

May 1995

September 1995

November 1995

March 1996

April 1996

LaserJ et 5Si, 5SiMx

Color LaserJ et 5, 5M

LaserJ et 5, 5M

LaserJ et 5Si Mopier

LaserJ et 6P, 6MP

LaserJ et 6L

October 1996

September 1997

November 1997

LaserJ et 4000 series

This guide also covers the HP 1200C and 1600C DeskJ et

printers.

1-2 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCL Feature

Support

Table 1-1, the PCL Feature Support Matrix, lists all the

printer commands from the PCL 5 Printer Language

Technical Reference Manual and identifies which of these

commands are supported by the various printers. More

detailed PCL information for each PCL 5 printer is

provided in Chapter 2.

Note

The PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual

(part number 5961-0509) was revised for the release of the

HP LaserJ et 4 printer and contains all PCL language

features up to the HP LaserJ et 4 printer.

With the introduction of the HP LaserJ et 4 printer,

Hewlett-Packard enhanced the PCL 5 printer language to

provide some new features. The major improvements to the

PCL 5 printer language are listed below.

600 dpi support for higher quality printing

45 scalable typefaces for greater type variety

TrueType rasterizer (in addition to the Intellifont

rasterizer) for fast Windows printing, and for matching

Windows and printer type (easy WYSIWYG)

New graphics commands for faster and better curves and

shading quality

Bi-directional I/O for easier use and sharing by providing

printer status to computer applications

Automatic and faster printer language switching

Automatic I/O switching for faster I/O rates

Improved memory management so most pages print in

standard memory

Improved PCL and HP-GL/2 performance for faster

graphics and text printing

Feature Set 1-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

In Table 1-1, if the command value field parameters are

not listed, then all parameters are supported by printers

that support that command.

The value in parentheses following a command

parameter identifies the parameter value field value (for

example, the parameter “Letter (2)” indicates that the

value field to select letter size in the Page Size command

is “2” ).

Commands which are not supported (“ns”) by a printer

are ignored.

1-4 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PCL 5 Technical

Reference Manual

Corrections

This section describes updates to the PCL 5 Printer

Language Technical Reference Manual (5961-0509).

Because this manual will not be updated, any changes to it

are documented in this guide. Some errors have been

identified in the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical

Reference Manual since its printing. Those errors are

identified and corrections are provided on this page.

Chapter 4

PCL Job Control

Commands

Unit of Measure Command

In Figure 4-6 on page 4-18, the two escape sequences at the

top should read “(?&u100D) and (?&u200D)” instead of

“(?&u100B) and (?&u200B).”

Chapter 8

PCL Font Selection

Transparent Print Data Command

The last sentence in the note at the bottom of page 8-33

should read “Refer to the PCL 5 Comparison Guide,

Appendix A, for character codes for the various symbol

sets.” instead of “Refer to Appendix A for character codes for

the various symbol sets.”

Chapter 13

The PCL Print Model

User-Defined Pattern Command

In Figure 13-10 on page 13-19, byte zero should read

Format (20) instead of Format (0)

On page 13-21, Format (Byte 0) should read “0” for a 300

DPI user-defined pattern header and “20” for a

resolution-specified user-defined pattern header.

Feature Set 1-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi IIIP

4Si

4PJ 4 Plus

4M 4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

MISCELLANEOUS

✓

Configuration (AppleTalk)

?&b#W[data] ns

JOB CONTROL

✓

Universal Exit/Start of PJ L

(UEL)

?%–12345X

✓

Reset

Number of Copies

Simplex/Duplex Print

Left (Long-Edge) Offset

Registration

?&l#X

?&l#S

?&l#U

✓

Top (Short-Edge) Offset

Registration

?&l#Z

✓

Unit Of Measure

Mechanical Print Quality

Media Type

?&u#D

?*o#Q

?&l#M

?&a#N

Negative Motion

✓- Indicates a command is supported. ns- Indicates a command is not supported.

Supported if duplex option is installed.

1-6 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND

Color LJ 5, 4LJ 4LC 5L

4000

Pro

6L 5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

MISCELLANEOUS

✓

Configuration (AppleTalk) ?&b#W[data]

ns ns

JOB CONTROL

✓

Universal Exit/Start of

PJ L (UEL)

?%–12345X

✓

Reset

Number of Copies

Simplex/Duplex Print

Left (Long-Edge) Offset

Registration

Top (Short-Edge) Offset

Registration

Unit Of Measure

Mechanical Print Quality

Media Type

?&l#X

?&l#S

?&l#U

✓

ns ns ns ns

✓

?&l#Z

✓

?&u#D

?*o#Q

?&l#M

?&a#N

✓

ns ns ns ns

Negative Motion

✓

- Indicates a command is supported. ns- Indicates a command is not supported.

Feature Set 1-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ

4 Plus

4M 4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

PAGE CONTROL

Page (J ob) Size

?&l#A

✓

Executive (1)

Letter (2)

Legal (3)

Ledger (6)

A5 (25)

✓

A4 (26)

A3 (27)

✓

J IS B5 Paper (45)

J IS B4 Paper (46)

Monarch Envelope (80)

Comm. 10 Envelope (81)

Intl. DL Envelope (90)

Intl. C5 Envelope (91)

Intl. B5 Envelope (100)

Custom (101)

✓

Hagaki Postcard (71)

Oufuku-Hagaki

Postcard (72)

✓

Orientation

?&l#O

?&a#G

?&l1T

Page Side Selection¹

J ob Separation

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

On non-duplex printers, this command causes a conditional page eject.

The custom size is 11.7" x 17.7" on the HP LaserJet 4V/4MV printers.

1-8 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND Color LJ 5,

4LJ

Pro

4LC

4000

5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

PAGE CONTROL

Page (J ob) Size

?&l#A

✓

Executive (1)

✓

Letter (2)

✓

Legal (3)

✓

Ledger (6)

✓

A5 (25)

✓

A4 (26)

✓

A3 (27)

✓

J IS B5 Paper (45)

J IS B4 Paper (46)

Monarch Envelope (80)

Com-10 Envelope (81)

Intl. DL Envelope (90)

Intl. C5 Envelope (91)

Intl. B5 Envelope (100)

Custom (101)

✓

ns²

✓

Hagaki Postcard (71)

✓

Oufuku-Hagaki

Postcard (72)

✓

Orientation

?&l#O

Page Side Selection⁴

?&a#G ns

?&l1T ns

J ob Separation

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Black & White only

For the HP LaserJet 5L printer, the printer driver sets the paper size to legal (3) when “custom” is selected.

The custom size is 11.7" x 17.7" on HP LaserJet 5Si, 5SiMx, and 5Si Mopier printers.

On non-duplex printers, this command causes a conditional page eject.

For the LaserJet 4000 series printers, the custom size is configurable via the control panel or PML.

Feature Set 1-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ

4 Plus

4M 4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

PAGE CONTROL (continued)

Paper (Media) Source

Eject Page (0)

?&l#H

✓

Main (Front) Paper

Source (1)

✓

Manual (Top/Rear)

Feed (2)

✓

Manual Env. Feed (3)

Alt. Paper Source (4)

Opt. Large Source (5)

Envelope Feeder (6)

Auto Select (7)

✓

Tray 1 (right side) (8)

HCI Trays 2-21 (20-39)

Output (Media) Bin

Automatic (0)

?&l#G

✓

Destination Tray 1 (1)

Destination Tray 2 (2)

Destination Tray 3 (3)

Print Direction

✓

?&a#P

?&c#T

?&a#L

?&a#M

?&l#E

?&l#F

?&l#L

?&k#H

?&l#C

?&l#D

✓

Character Text Path Dir.

Left Margin

✓

Right Margin

Clear Horizontal Margins

Top Margin

Text Length

Perforation Skip

Horizontal Motion Index

Vertical Motion Index

Line Spacing

ALPHANUMERIC ID (Media selection by type/PCL mass storage command)

Alphanumeric ID

?&n#W[oper-

ation] [string]

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

1-10 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

6P 5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND

Color LJ 5,

LJ 5M

PAGE CONTROL (continued)

4LJ 4LC 5L

Pro

4000

6L 5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

Paper (Media) Source

Eject Page (0)

?&l#H

✓

Main (Front) Paper

Source (1)

✓

Manual (Top/Rear)

Feed (2)

✓

Manual Env. Feed (3)

Alt. Paper Source (4)

Optional Source (5)

Envelope Feeder (6)

Auto Select (7)

✓

ns ns

✓

ns ns ns ns

✓

Tray 1 (right side) (8)

HCI Trays 2-21 (20-39)

Output (Media) Bin

✓

?&l#G

✓

Automatic (0)

✓

ns ns ns ns

✓

Destination Tray 1 (1)

Destination Tray 2

Destination Tray 3

Print Direction

✓

?&a#P

?&c#T

?&a#L

?&a#M

✓

Character Text Path Dir.

Left Margin

✓

Right Margin

Clear Horizontal Margins ?9

Top Margin

?&l#E

Text Length

?&l#F

?&l#L

?&k#H

?&l#C

?&l#D

Perforation Skip

Horizontal Motion Index

Vertical Motion Index

Line Spacing

ALPHANUMERIC ID (Media selection by type/PCL mass storage command)

✓

Alphanumeric ID

?&n#W[oper- ns

ation] [string]

ns ns ns ns

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

The LaserJet 4000 series printers support HCI trays 2– 41 (20 – 59)

Feature Set 1-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ 4 Plus

4M 4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

CURSOR POSITIONING

✓

Horizontal Position

Vertical Position

?&a#C

?*p#X

?&a#H

?&a#R

?*p#Y

?&a#V

Half Line Feed

Line Termination

Push/Pop Position

?&k#G

?&f#S

FONT SELECTION

The Primary font printer commands in this table can be changed to Secondary by replacing the left parenthesis

“(” in the command with a right parenthesis “)”.

✓

Symbol Set (Primary)

Spacing (Primary)

?(ID

?(s#P

?(s#H

?(s#V

?(s#S

?(s#B

?(s#T

?(#X

Pitch (Primary)

Height (Primary)

Style (Primary)

Stroke Weight (Primary)

Typeface (Primary)

Font Selection By ID # (Pri.)

Select Default Font (Primary) ?(3@

Underline

?&d#D

?&d@

?&p#X[data]

?&t#P

Transparent Print Data

Text Parsing Method

FONT MANAGEMENT

✓

Assign Font ID #

Font Control

?*c#D

?*c#F

USER-DEFINED SYMBOL SET

✓

Symbol Set ID Code

Define Symbol Set

Symbol Set Control

?*c#R

?(f#W[data]

?*c#S

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

1-12 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

Desk-

Jet

Desk-

Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND

Color LJ 5, 4LJ 4LC 5L 5P 6P 5SiMx

LJ 5M Pro

CURSOR POSITIONING

4000

6L 5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

✓

Horizontal Position

Vertical Position

?&a#C

?*p#X

?&a#H

?&a#R

?*p#Y

?&a#V

Half Line Feed

Line Termination

Push/Pop Position

?&k#G

?&f#S

FONT SELECTION

The Primary font commands in this table can be changed to Secondary by replacing the left parenthesis “(” in

the command with a right parenthesis “)”.

✓

Symbol Set (Primary)

Spacing (Primary)

Pitch (Primary)

Height (Primary)

Style (Primary)

Stroke Weight (Primary)

Typeface (Primary)

Font Selection By ID # (Pri.)

Select Default Font (Primary) ?(3@

Underline

?(ID

?(s#P

?(s#H

?(s#V

?(s#S

?(s#B

?(s#T

?(#X

?&d#D

?&d@

?&p#X[data]

?&t#P

✓

Transparent Print Data

Text Parsing Method

✓

FONT MANAGEMENT

✓

Assign Font ID #

Font Control

?*c#D

?*c#F

USER-DEFINED SYMBOL SET

✓

Symbol Set ID Code

Define Symbol Set

Symbol Set Control

?*c#R

?(f#W[data]

?*c#S

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Available in code versions “B” and “C” only (see the DeskJet 1200C section near the end of this chapter).

Feature Set 1-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ 4 Plus

4M 4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

SOFT FONT CREATION

Font Descriptor

Range: 0 - 32767

Range: 0 - 65535

Character Code

Download Character

?)s#W[data]

✓

?*c#E

?(s#W[data]

MACROS

✓

Macro ID

?&f#Y

?&f#X

✓

Macro Control

PRINT MODEL IMAGING

✓

Source Transparency Mode

Pattern Transparency Mode

Area Fill (Pattern) ID

?*v#N

?*v#O

?*c#G

?*v#T

Select Current Pattern

✓

Solid Black (0)

Solid White (1)

HP Shading Pattern (2)

Cross-hatch Pattern (3)

(HP-hatch Pattern)

✓

User-defined Pattern (4)

Logical Operation

?*l#O

?*l#R

Pixel Placement

USER-DEFINED PATTERN

✓

Define (Download) Pattern

Range: 0 - 32767

?*c#W[data] ns

✓

Range: 0 - 65535

✓

Set Pattern Reference Point

User-defined Pattern Control

?*p#R

?*c#Q

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

1-14 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

6P 5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND

Color LJ 5, 4LJ 4LC 5L

4000

Pro

6L 5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

SOFT FONT CREATION

Font Descriptor

?)s#W[data]

✓

Range: 0 - 32767

Range: 0 - 65535

Character Code

✓

?*c#E

?(s#W[data]

Download Character

MACROS

✓

Macro ID

?&f#Y

?&f#X

✓

Macro Control

PRINT MODEL IMAGING

✓

Source Transparency

Mode

?*v#N

?*v#O

Pattern Transparency

Mode

Area Fill (Pattern) ID

Select Current Pattern

?*c#G

?*v#T

✓

Solid Black (0)

Solid White (1)

HP Shading Pattern (2)

Cross-hatch Pattern (3)

(HP-hatch Pattern)

✓

User-defined Pattern (4)

Logical Operation

?*l#O

?*l#R

Pixel Placement

USER-DEFINED PATTERN

✓

Define (Download) Pattern ?*c#W[data]

Range: 0 - 32767

Range: 0 - 65535

✓

Set Pattern Reference

Point

?*p#R

?*c#Q

✓

User-defined Pattern

Control

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Feature Set 1-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ

4 Plus

4M 4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

RASTER GRAPHICS

Raster Resolution

?*t#R

✓

75 Dots/Inch (75)

100 Dots/Inch (100)

150 Dots/Inch (150)

200 Dots/Inch (200) ¹

300 Dots/Inch (300)

600 Dots/Inch (600) ¹

Graphics Presentation

Raster Height (Source)

Raster Height (Destination)

Raster Width (Source)

Raster Width (Destination)

Scale Algorithm

✓

?*r#F

?*r#T

?*t#V

?*r#S

?*t#H

?*t#K

?*r#A

✓

Start Raster Graphics

At logical page left limit(0)

At CAP (1)

✓

At logic. page left limit,

scaling ON (2)

At CAP, scaling ON (3)

Y Offset

✓

?*b#Y

?*b#M

Set Compression Mode

✓

Unencoded (0)

Run-Length Encoded (1)

TIFF Encoded (2)

Delta Row Encoded (3)

Mode 5 Adaptive (5)

Replacement Delta Row (9)

✓

Transfer Raster (Row/Block) ?*b#W[data]

Transfer Raster (Plane)

?*b#V[data]

End Graphics

✓

Version B

?*rB

?*rC

Version C (Preferred)

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Supported if printer resolution is 600 dpi.

The 4ML printer does not support 200 or 600 dpi operation.

1-16 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

6P 5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND

Color LJ 5, 4LJ 4LC 5L

LJ 5M Pro

RASTER GRAPHICS

4000

6L 5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

Raster Resolution

?*t#R

✓

75 Dots/Inch (75)

100 Dots/Inch (100)

150 Dots/Inch (150)

200 Dots/Inch (200) ¹

✓

300 Dots/Inch (300)

600 Dots/Inch (600) ¹

Graphics Presentation

Raster Height (Source)

Raster Height (Destination)

Raster Width (Source)

Raster Width (Destination)

Scale Algorithm

✓

?*r#F

?*r#T

?*t#V

?*r#S

?*t#H

?*t#K

?*r#A

✓

ns ns ns ns ns

✓

ns ns ns ns ns

Start Raster Graphics

✓

At logical page left limit(0)

At CAP (1)

At logic. page left limit,

scaling ON (2)

ns ns ns ns ns

✓

At CAP, scaling ON (3)

Y Offset

ns ns ns ns ns

✓

?*b#Y

?*b#M

Set Compression Mode

✓

Unencoded (0)

Run-Length Encoded (1)

TIFF Encoded (2)

Delta Row Encoded (3)

Mode 5 Adaptive (5)

Replacement Delta Row (9)

✓

ns ns ns ns ns

✓

Transfer Raster (Row/Block) ?*b#W[data]

Transfer Raster (Plane)

✓

?*b#V[data]

ns ns ns ns ns

End Graphics

✓

Version B

?*rB

?*rC

Version C (Preferred)

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Supported if printer resolution is 600 dpi.

Feature Set 1-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ

4 Plus

4M 4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

RECTANGULAR AREA FILL

✓

Horizontal Rectangle Size

Vertical Rectangle Size

?*c#A

?*c#H

?*c#B

?*c#V

?*c#G

✓

Pattern ID (Area Fill ID)

1-100 for Shading

✓

1-6 for Cross-hatch

0-32767 for User-defined

Fill Rectangle Area

?*c#P

✓

Black (solid) (0)

✓

(Solid) White (erase) (1)

Shaded (gray) (2)

Cross-hatch Pattern (3)

User-defined Pattern (4)

Current Pattern (5)

✓

STATUS READBACK

✓

Set Status Readback

Location Type

?*s#T

?*s#U

?*s#I

✓

Set Status Readback

Location Unit

Inquire Status Readback

Entity

✓

Free Space

Flush All Pages

Echo

?*s1M

?&r#F

?*s#X

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

1-18 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND Color LJ 5, 4LJ

LJ 5M Pro

4LC 5L

4000

6L 5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

RECTANGULAR AREA FILL

✓

Horizontal Rectangle Size

Vertical Rectangle Size

Pattern ID (Area Fill ID)

?*c#A

?*c#H

?*c#B

?*c#V

?*c#G

✓

1-100 for Shading

1-6 for Cross-hatch

0-32767 for User-defined

Fill Rectangle Area

?*c#P

✓

Black (solid) (0)

(Solid) White (erase) (1)

Shaded (gray) (2)

Cross-hatch Pattern (3)

User-defined Pattern (4)

Current Pattern (5)

STATUS READBACK

✓

Set Status Readback

Location Type

?*s#T

?*s#U

?*s#I

Set Status Readback

Location Unit

Inquire Status Readback

Entity

✓

Free Space

Flush All Pages

Echo

?*s1M

?&r#F

?*s#X

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Feature Set 1-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ

4 Plus

4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

PICTURE FRAME (for Vector Graphics)

✓

Picture Frame Horiz. Size ?*c#X

Picture Frame Vert. Size

?*c#Y

?*c0T

Set Picture Frame Anchor

Point

✓

HP-GL/2 Horiz. Plot Size

HP-GL/2 Vert. Plot Size

Enter HP-GL/2

?*c#K

?*c#L

?%#B

_Stand-alone plotter (-1)

_Previous HP-GL (0)

_Current PCL CAP (1)

✓

_Current PCL coordinates

and old HP-GL/2 (2)

_Current PCL coordi-

nates & current CAP (3)

✓

Enter PCL Mode

?%#A

PROGRAMMING HINTS

Display Functions

✓

?&s#C

Off

End-Of-Line Wrap

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

1-20 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1.

PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND Color LJ 5, 4LJ

LJ 5M Pro

4LC

4000

5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

PICTURE FRAME (for Vector Graphics)

✓

Picture Frame Horiz. Size

Picture Frame Vert. Size

?*c#X

?*c#Y

?*c0T

✓

Set Picture Frame Anchor

Point

✓

HP-GL/2 Horiz. Plot Size

HP-GL/2 Vert. Plot Size

Enter HP-GL/2

?*c#K

?*c#L

?%#B

✓

_Stand-alone plotter (-1)

_Previous HP-GL (0)

_Current PCL CAP (1)

✓

_Current PCL coordinates

and old HP-GL/2 (2)

✓

_Current PCL coordi-

nates & current CAP (3)

✓

Enter PCL Mode

?%#A

PROGRAMMING HINTS

Display Functions

✓

?&s#C

Off

End-Of-Line Wrap

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Feature Set 1-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ

4 Plus

4M 4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

PCL 5 COLOR COMMANDS

Assign Color Index

Color Component 1

Color Component 2

Color Component 3

Color Lookup Tables

Configure Image Data

?*v#I

?*v#A

?*v#B

?*v#C

?*l#W[data]

?*v#W[data] ns

Download Dither Matrix ?*m#W

Foreground Color

?*v#S

?*t#I

Gamma Correction

Monochrome Print Mode ?&b#M

Palette Control ID

Palette Control

Push/Pop Palette

Render Algorithm

Range: 0 - 8

?&p#I

?&p#C

?*p#P

?*t#J

Range: 9 - 10

Range: 11 - 14

Range: 15 - 19

Select Palette

?&p#S

?*i#W[data]

?*r#U

Set Viewing Illuminant

Simple Color

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

1-22 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND

Color LJ 5, 4LJ 4LC 5L

LJ 5M Pro

PCL 5 COLOR COMMANDS

4000

6L 5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

✓

Assign Color Index

Color Component 1

Color Component 2

Color Component 3

Color Lookup Tables

Configure Image Data

?*v#I

?*v#A

?*v#B

?*v#C

?*l#W[data]

?*v#W[data]

ns ns ns ns

✓

Download Dither Matrix ?*m#W

Foreground Color

?*v#S

?*t#I

Gamma Correction

Monochrome Print Mode ?&b#M

Palette Control ID

?&p#I

?&p#C

?*p#P

?*t#J

Palette Control

✓

Push/Pop Palette

Render Algorithm

✓

Range: 0 - 8

Range: 9 - 10

ns ns ns ns

✓

Range: 11 - 14

Range: 15 - 19

Select Palette

Set Viewing Illuminant

Simple Color

✓

?&p#S

?*i#W[data]

?*r#U

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Feature Set 1-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

4ML

FUNCTION

COMMAND

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4PJ

4 Plus

4SiMx

4MP

4M Plus 4MV

HP-GL/2 GRAPHICS

✓

HP-GL/2—Commands

listed in Table A-2

except as shown below

Advance Full Page

Bezier

✓

BR, BZ

Begin Plot

Chord Tolerance Mode

(Relative) Color Range

Download Character

Fill Type

✓

Odd/Even

Non-Zero Winding

Frame Advance

Label origin

✓

1-9 / 11-19

Media Type

Merge Control

Number of Pens

Output Error

✓

Output Hardcopy Limits OH

Output Identification

Output P1 and P2

Output Status

Pen Color Assignment

Pixel Placement

Plot Size

✓

Quality Level

Replot

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

1-24 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 1-1. PCL 5 Feature Support Matrix (continued)

Color

5Si

5SiMx

Desk- Desk-

Jet Jet

FUNCTION

COMMAND Color LJ 5, 4LJ

4LC

4000

Pro

5MP 6MP Mopier 5M series 1200C 1600C

HP-GL/2 GRAPHICS

✓

HP-GL/2—Commands

listed in Table A-2 except

as shown below

✓

Advance Full Page

Bezier

✓

BR, BZ

✓

Begin Plot

✓

Chord Tolerance Mode

(Relative) Color Range

Download Character

Fill Type

✓

Odd/Even

✓

Non-Zero Winding

Frame Advance

Label origin

✓

1-9 / 11-19

✓

Media Type

✓

Merge Control

Number of Pens

Output Error

Output Hardcopy Limits

Output Identification

Output P1 and P2

Output Status

Pen Color Assignment

Pixel Placement

Plot Size

✓

Quality Level

Replot

✓

- Indicates a command is supported.

ns - Indicates a command is not supported.

Supported in stand-alone HP-GL/2 Mode only (DeskJet 1200)

Feature Set 1-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printable Area

The relationships between physical page, logical page,

default picture frame, and printable area are illustrated

in Figures 1-1 and 1-2. The tables list the variations in

sizes for the different physical page sizes. For more

information concerning printable area or logical/physical

page differences, consult the PCL 5 Printer Language

Technical Reference Manual.

1-26 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIMENSIONS (at 300 DPI - double for 600 DPI)

PAPER SIZE

Letter

Portrait Dimensions

2550

3300

2175

2480

3507

1237

1162

1913

2078

1299

3035

2149

1181

1748

3300

4200

5100

3150

3507

4960

2850

2250

2704

2952

2598

4299

3035

1748

2362

2400

3150

2025

2338

3365

1087

1012

1771

1936

1157

2893

2007

1039

1606

3300

4200

5100

3150

3507

4960

2850

2250

2704

2952

2598

4299

3035

1748

2362

150

Legal

150

Ledger

Executive

Com-10

Monarch

JIS B4

JIS B5

Hagaki

Oufuku-hagaki

Figure 1-1. Portrait Logical Page and Printable Area Boundaries

Feature Set 1-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DIMENSIONS (at 300 DPI - double for 600 DPI)

PAPER SIZE

Letter

Landscape Dimensions

3300

4200

5100

3150

3507

4960

2850

2250

2704

2952

2598

4299

3035

1748

2362

2550

3300

2175

2480

3507

1237

1162

1913

2078

1299

3035

2149

1181

1748

3180

4080

4980

3030

3389

4842

2730

2130

2586

2834

2480

4181

2917

1630

2244

2550

3300

2175

2480

3507

1237

1162

1913

2078

1299

3035

2149

1181

1748

150

Legal

150

Ledger

Executive

Com-10

Monarch

JIS B4

JIS B5

Hagaki

Oufuku-hagaki

Figure 1-2. Landscape Logical Page and Printable Area Boundaries

1-28 Feature Set

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer-Specific Differences

Introduction

Each Hewlett-Packard printer implements minor variations

of PCL 5 in order to best suit its intended use. This chapter

describes specific differences that are important when

developing applications for the various PCL 5 printers. The

sections in this chapter describe such information as new

commands not contained in the PCL 5 Printer Language

Technical Reference Manual, and other miscellaneous

differences in PCL operation particular to that printer.

HP LaserJet III and

IIID Printers

With the introduction of the HP LaserJ et III printer,

Hewlett-Packard introduced the PCL 5 printer language.

The PCL 5 printer language incorporated many new

features over the PCL 4 language. A few of the more

significant features included such things as the addition of

a scalable font technology, HP-GL/2 vector graphics

language support, print model features, raster graphics

enhancements, and the Print Direction command.

The HP LaserJ et IIID printer language support is basically

identical to the HP LaserJ et III printer except for the

addition of the duplex feature, dual input bin, envelope

feeder support and their associated commands (see

Table 1-1).

Printer-Specific Differences 2-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet IIISi

Printer

Several new PCL features were added to the PCL 5

language with the release of the HP LaserJ et IIISi printer.

These new features are summarized in Table 2-1 below.

Table 2-1.

PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet IIISi Printer

Feature

Number of Copies

Status

Modified

New

Comments

Greater range, 1 to 32,767.

Page Size

C5 Envelopes not supported.

Output Bin Selection Command

Allows programmatic selection of upper or lower

output paper bins.

End Raster Graphics Command

Job Separation

New/Modified

New Command

New Additions

Modified version of the existing End Raster

Graphics command.

Causes the paper stacker to shift positions to

offset the output paper stack.

Fonts

Four variations of Univers Condensed; ITC Zapf

Dingbats in five symbol sets.

HP LaserJet IIIP

Printer

Several new PCL features were added to the PCL 5

language with the release of the HP LaserJ et IIIP printer.

These new features are summarized in Table 2-2. One new

feature listed here is adaptive compression (method 5) for

the Raster Compression Mode command. In addition to

compressing data for transmission, if certain rules are

followed (discussed below), the HP LaserJ et IIIP printer

will store adaptive compressed data in compressed format

and only decompress it when required for printing. There

are certain requirements which must be met for this data to

be stored in compressed format. These requirements are

discussed following Table 2-2.

2-2 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-2.

HP LaserJet IIIP PCL Feature Additions

Feature/Command

Status

Comments

Set Compression Method

Modified

Adds Adaptive Compression method to the Set

Compression Method command.

End Raster Graphics Command

User-defined Patterns

Modified

New

Modified version of the End Raster Graphics command.

Enables users to define and download their own user-

defined pattern.

User-defined Pattern Command

New Feature

Used to download the binary data for user-defined

pattern.

Set Pattern Reference Point Command

Pattern Control Command

New

Sets pattern reference point.

Used to make user-defined patterns permanent or

temporary, or to delete them.

Select Pattern & Fill Rectangular Area

Commands

Modified

Adds a parameter to support user-defined patterns.

Pattern ID Command

In addition to selecting internal patterns, this command

is now used to assign an ID to a user-defined pattern as

well as to select patterns. Also, parameter range is

extended from 100 to 32,767.

User-defined Symbol Sets

New Feature

Enables user to build a symbol set which contains user-

selected characters.

Define Symbol Set Command

Symbol Set ID Code Command

New

Identifies the characters for a user-defined symbol set.

Assigns a number for identification to the user-defined

symbol set.

Symbol Set Control Command

Unbound Scalable Fonts

New

New Feature

New

Used to make user-defined symbol sets permanent or

temporary, or to delete them.

Allows typefaces (unbound fonts), not just fonts (bound

fonts) to be downloaded to the printer.

Unbound Scalable Font Descriptor

Addition of a new header used for unbound fonts (font

type 10).

Printer-Specific Differences 2-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Raster Graphics

Adaptive

Compression (IIIP)

Adaptive compression was added to the PCL language with

the introduction of the HP LaserJ et IIIP printer. Adaptive

compression (or method 5 as it is referred to) is a method

for compressing raster data using the raster Set

Compression Method command (parameter value 5). (Refer

to the Set Compression Method command in the PCL 5

Printer Language Technical Reference manual for detailed

information on using this compression technique.) Also,

refer to Chapter 4 in this document, “Raster Graphics

Adaptive Compression (Method 5)” for additional

information.

HP LaserJet 4

Printer

Several new PCL features were added to the PCL 5

language with the release of the HP LaserJ et 4 printer.

These new features are summarized in Table 2-3. Most of

these features are described in the revised PCL 5 Printer

Language Technical Reference Manual (part number

5961-0509). (This revised technical reference manual is

supplied as part of the Technical Reference Documentation

Package which can be obtained by ordering part number

5961-0601.) In addition, there are some additional

differences for the HP LaserJ et 4 printer that are not

covered in the technical reference manual but are described

below.

Note

The HP LaserJ et 4M printer, in addition to PCL, contains

PostScript and a LocalTalk I/O for printing in the

Macintosh environment. PCL operation and the PCL

internal fonts for this printer are identical to the HP

LaserJ et 4 printer. Thus, for PCL information for the HP

LaserJ et 4M printer, refer to the HP LaserJ et 4 printer

features.

2-4 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-3.

PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 4

Feature/Command

Support

Comments

Adaptive Compression System

New

Adaptive compression system enables the printer to

compress internal raster data when memory becomes low.

This operation occurs automatically; there are no PCL

commands for this feature (refer to Chapter 5 for ADC

information).

Configuration Command

Number of Copies

New

Modified

New

Allows PCL jobs to be printed (using LocalTalk or

EtherTalk MIO) using AppleTalk protocol.

Supports 1-32,767 copies as does the HP LaserJ et IIISi

printer.

Units of Measure Command

Page Size

Allows selection of the units of measure for cursor moves,

drawing rules, and for character spacing (font metrics).

Modified

A parameter value is added for B5 envelope size; the HP

LaserJ et 4 printer supports the four standard paper sizes

and five envelope sizes.

Bitmap Font Support

Scalable Font Support

New Header

Printer will expand 300 dpi bitmap fonts to 600 dpi. A new

300/600 dpi bitmap font descriptor has been added to

allow bitmap fonts to be created that work at either 1/300

or 1/600 inch printer resolution.

A new Universal header has been added to allow design of

typefaces of different scaling technologies to be supported

by one header. This header is used to support TrueType on

the HP LaserJ et 4 printer. (This header will be used to

support any other new scaling technologies HP may add in

the future).

True Type

New

TrueType scaling technology support has been added to

the printer.

Internal Typefaces

Several new Intellifont and TrueType internal typefaces

(and supporting symbol sets) are now provided in the

printer.

Raster Resolution Command

User-defined Pattern

Modified

Parameter values have been added to support raster

resolutions of 200 dpi and 600 dpi.

New Header

A new 300/600 dpi user-defined pattern header has been

added to support patterns that work at either 1/300 or

1/600 inch printer resolution.

Continued on next page.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-3.

PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 4 (continued)

Feature/Command

Support

Comments

Status Readback

New Feature

The addition of 6 new status readback commands enable

the user to receive certain information back from the

printer about fonts, symbol sets, macros, user-defined

patterns, and available memory.

Location Type Command

Location Unit Command

Inquire Entity Command

New

Used to specify a status readback type of location

(current, all, internal, downloaded, cartridge, SIMMs).

Specifies a status readback location unit (all, temporary

or permanent, highest-lowest priority, specific SIMM).

Requests the status from the location (type and unit)

specified for fonts, symbol sets, macros, or user-defined

patterns.

Flush All Pages Command

Free Memory Command

Echo Command

New

Allows the user to clear page data from printer memory.

This command returns the current available memory.

Allows the user to send a unique ID number to the

printer to be used as a “place holder.”

Bezier Curve Commands

New

HP-GL/2 commands (relative and absolute) that allow a

user to draw complex curves with less data required

than that required for arcs.

Label Origin

Fill Polygon

Modified

Label position LO 21 is provided for correct alignment of

HP-GL/2 text with PCL text.

Previously, the HP-GL/2 Fill Polygon command filled

polygons using the odd/even fill technique. A second

technique, non-zero winding fill, has been added.

Macros

Modified

New

HP-GL/2 is now supported in macros.

Configuration Command

Added to allow the user to communicate with the MIO

card in the printer.

2-6 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Configuration

Command

The Configuration command allows a user to send PCL jobs

to the printer over AppleTalk. This data is sent in the form

of “key/value” data pairs (refer to “AppleTalk

(AppleTalk)

Configuration” below for more information).

?& b # W [k ey]<sp >[va lu e]

# = Number of data bytes that follow command

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = 0 - 32767

[k ey] can be 1 character through 32765 characters.

[va lu e] can be 1 character through 32765 characters.

AppleTalk Configuration

The HP LaserJ et 4 printer can be configured to receive

PCL print jobs over an AppleTalk connection using

the Configuration command. The HP LaserJ et 4 MIO

AppleTalk interfaces support three key values: RENAME,

J OB, and TYP E. These keys are used for configuring an

installed LocalTalk or EtherTalk MIO card to allow PCL

print jobs generated by a Macintosh host to be printed.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

PostScript in the HP LaserJ et 4 printer supports the

PostScript level 1 operators setprintername,

AppleTalktype, and jobname, and the PostScript level 2

setdevparams operator to allow PostScript print jobs to

change the Name Binding Protocol (NBP) printer name

and printer type, as well as change the print job name.

MIO sub-system in the printer accepts a new NBP

printer name, NBP printer type, and job name from

either the PCL or PostScript personalities. The printer

passes that information across the MIO interface to the

installed MIO card which indicated support for the MIO

AppleTalk extensions. The MIO sub-system will treat the

PCL NBP type and the PostScript NBP type separately.

For information about AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol

refer to Inside AppleTalk published by Addison Wesley

Company, Inc.

RENAME

RENAME changes the printer name portion of the printer ’s

AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol name field.

?&b#WRENAME<sp >p r in ter n a m e

Valid characters for the printer name include 0-255 except

for characters $00, “@” ($40), “:” ($3A), “*” ($2A), “=” ($3D),

and $C5. The printername must contain at least one

character, and only the first 31 characters are used. If an

invalid character ($00 is not treated as an invalid

character) is contained in the printername, the printer will

ignore the escape sequence. If the printer encounters the

NULL ($00) character, the printer uses the NULL character

to terminate the printer name. All the characters preceding

the NULL will be used. If another device on the AppleTalk

network uses the same printer name, another character is

added to the end of the printer name.

The default printername is the printer model (for example,

“HP LaserJ et 4”).

2-8 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

JOB

J OB renames the current job name.

?&b#WJ OB<sp >jobn a m e

All characters are valid. For the job name the first 127

characters are used.

There is no default jobname.

TYPE

TYPE changes the type (device type) portion of the printer ’s

AppleTalk Name Binding Protocol type field.

?&b#WTYP E<sp >d evicetyp e

Valid characters for the device type include 0-255 except for

characters $00, “@” ($40), “:” ($3A), “*” ($2A), “=” ($3D), and

$C5. The devicetype must contain at least one character,

and only the first 31 characters are used. If an invalid

character ($00 is not treated as an invalid character) is

contained in the devicetype, the printer will ignore the

escape sequence. If the printer encounters the NULL ($00)

character in the devicetype, it uses the NULL character to

terminate the device type. All the characters preceding the

NULL will be used as the devicetype. If the device type is

invalid then the printer ’s type is not changed.

The default device type for PCL is “HP LaserJ et 4” and for

PostScript is “LaserWriter”.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 4Si

Printer

The HP LaserJ et 4Si printer is the follow-on to the HP

LaserJ et IIISi printer. The HP LaserJ et 4Si printer

contains many new PCL features over the HP LaserJ et

IIISi. PCL support for the HP LaserJ et 4Si printer is

identical to the HP LaserJ et 4 printer except for the

addition of the duplex feature, dual output bin (see Table

1-1) and resource saving.

Like the HP LaserJ et IIISi printer, the HP LaserJ et 4Si

supports the HP LaserJ et IIISi features listed in Table 2-1

with two exceptions. First, is that the HP LaserJ et 4Si does

not support ITC Zapf Dingbats. Font support for the HP

LaserJ et 4Si is identical to the HP LaserJ et 4 printer (refer

to Chapter 3, “Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,”

for complete font support information). The other exception

concerns job separation. The PCL J ob Separation command

is not supported. The HP LaserJ et 4Si printer handles job

separation through the control panel. If a PCL J ob

Separation command is received by the printer it will be

ignored. Refer to the HP LaserJ et 4Si User ’s Manual (part

number C2010-90901) for additional information.

Resource saving, a new feature in the HP LaserJ et 4Si

printer, allows saving information for the current language

(PCL or PostScript) when switching to the other language.

If resource saving is enabled (from the control panel or PJ L;

no PCL commands are required for this operation), all the

permanent fonts, macros, and user-defined patterns plus

some other miscellaneous data is saved in a reserved

portion of printer memory. This data is stored until

the language is enabled again. When the language is

re-enabled, the stored data will be made available for use.

2-10 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 4L

Printer

The HP LaserJ et 4L printer is a smaller, low-cost HP

LaserJ et printer. The control panel on this printer is

limited to one button with four indicators. Many of

the control panel functions must be controlled program-

matically using Hewlett-Packard’s Printer J ob Language

(refer to the Printer J ob Language Technical Reference

Manual, part number 5021-0380 for detailed PJ L

information).

The HP LaserJ et 4L printer PCL command features are

identical to those of the HP LaserJ et 4 printer PCL

features, except for some differences in parameter values

(such as for paper source—refer to Table 1-1). Additional

features which do not require PCL command control

include EconoMode and HP Memory Enhancement

technology (MEt). EconoMode causes the printer to print

less dots, thus saving toner. Memory Enhancement

technology involves some memory saving techniques to

better utilize available memory (refer to Chapter 5,

“Memory Usage” for additional information).

Typefaces in the HP LaserJ et 4L printer are different from

those of the HP LaserJ et 4 printer. The HP LaserJ et 4

printer contains both Intellifont and TrueType scaling

technologies, but the 4L contains only Intellifont scaling

technology. Thus, the 4L does not contain any of the

TrueType typefaces, with one modification. The TrueType

Wingdings typeface has been converted to Intellifont format

and is available in the printer as an Intellifont typeface

(refer to Chapter 3, “Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol

Sets” for additional information).

Printer-Specific Differences 2-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 4ML

Printer

The HP LaserJ et 4ML printer is similar to the HP LaserJ et

4L printer, however, the 4ML includes PostScript and a

LocalTalk I/O for printing in the Macintosh environment.

The HP LaserJ et 4ML printer also includes some new PCL

features: print model logical operation (ROP3) and pixel

placement, as described on the following pages.

The HP LaserJ et 4ML supports the typefaces that the HP

LaserJ et 4 printer supports. Several of the typefaces in the

HP LaserJ et 4ML printer have additional support for the

Latin 2 and Latin 5 symbol sets (refer to Chapter 3,

“Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,” for complete

font support information).

Table 2-4.

PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 4ML

Feature

Status

Comments

Paper (Job) Size Command

Modified

An additional parameter (101) has been added to provide

support for custom size.

Logical Operations

New

Modifies the print model to allow logical operations (such as

AND, OR, XOR, NOT) to be performed on source, texture,

and destination.

Pixel Placement (PCL)

Pixel Placement (HP-GL/2)

Merge Control

Allows user to select either grid intersection or grid

centered placement of pixels when rendering an image in

PCL.

Allows user to select either grid intersection or grid

centered placement of pixels when rendering an image in

HP-GL/2.

Allows the user to use logical operations (ROP’s) in

HP-GL/2.

2-12 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logical Operations

With the introduction of the HP LaserJ et 4ML printer the

print model was expanded to include logical operations.

The basic print model defines how a pattern, source image,

and destination image are applied to each other using the

print model’s transparent and opaque modes to produce a

resulting image (refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language

Technical Reference Manual for detailed information about

the basic print model operation). The Logical Operations

(?*l#O) command can apply logical functions (e.g., AND,

OR, XOR, NOT) to any of these operands except

transparency, which must be specified first.

The print model process consists of the following steps:

1. Specify source and/or pattern transparency modes, if

desired.

2. Specify the logical operation (or use the default).

3. Define the desired operands (source, destination,

pattern).

Definitions

Source: The source image may be one of the following:

HP-GL/2 primitives

Rules

Characters

Raster images (single plane mask or multiplane color)

Destination: The destination image contains whatever is

currently defined on the page. It includes any images

placed through previous operations.

Pattern or Texture: The pattern is defined by Current

Pattern (?*v#T). The terms pattern and texture are used

interchangeably in this section.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Transparency Modes: The white pixels of the source and/or

pattern may be made transparent (source transparency 0,

pattern transparency 0). The destination shows through

these areas.

Transparency modes are set by the Source Transparency

(?*v#N) and Pattern Transparency (?*v#O) commands

(refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference

Manual).

The print model allows logical operations, such as AND,

OR, XOR, NOT, to be performed on source, texture, and

destination images. Transparency modes and Logical

Operation must be specified before printable data is sent.

Operators

Source Transparency (specified before logical operation;

default is transparent)

Pattern Transparency (specified before logical operation;

default is transparent)

Logical Operators (default is Texture OR Source)

Operands

Source objects: character cell, raster image, rule,

HP-GL/2 vectors and polygons

Texture: pattern mask

Destination: current page definition

Assuming three bits per pixel, the following diagram shows

the print model process.

2-14 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Notes

The Logical Operation command (?*l#O) provides 255

possible logical operations. All of these logic operations

map directly to their ROP3 (raster operation)

counterparts (see the Microsoft Document, Reference,

Volume 2, Chapter 11, Binary and Ternary Raster

Operation Codes).

The logical operations were defined by Microsoft

Windows for an RGB color space (a ‘‘1’’ is white and a “0”

is black).

Logical Operations

and Transparency

Interactions

As described above, transparency modes operate in addition

to logical operations. The logical operations in Table 2-5,

Logical Operations (ROP3), on the following pages, are true

only if source and pattern transparency (for white pixels)

are explicitly set to opaque (?*v1N and ?*v1O). If source

and/or pattern transparency modes are transparent

(defaulted), the additional operations shown on the

following page must be performed to achieve the final

result.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The four basic interactions are:

Ca se 1: Source and Pattern are opaque.

Return ROP3 ( Dest, Src, Texture ).

Ca se 2: Source is opaque, Pattern is transparent.

Temporary_ROP3 = ROP3 ( Dest, Src, Texture ).

Image_A = Temporary_ROP3, & Not Src.

Image_B = Temporary_ROP3 & Pattern.

Image_C = Not Pattern & Src & Dest.

Return Image_A | Image_B | Image_C

Ca se 3: Source is transparent, Pattern is opaque.

Temporary_ROP3 = ROP3 ( Dest, Src, Texture ).

Image_A = Temporary_ROP3 & Src.

Image_B = Dest & Not Src.

Return Image_A | Image_B

Ca se 4: Source and Pattern are transparent

Temporary_ROP3 = ROP3 ( Dest, Src, Texture ).

Image_A = Temporary_ROP3 & Src & Pattern.

Image_B = Dest & Not Src.

Image_C = Dest & Not Pattern.

Return Image_A | Image_B | Image_C.

2-16 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logical Operation

Command

Specifies the logical operation to be performed in RGB color

space on the destination, source and texture to produce new

destination data.

?*l# O

# = Logical operation value (see Table 2-6)

Default = 252 (TSo)

Range = 0 to 255

Note

When source and/or pattern transparency modes are set

opaque (not defaulted), values specified by this command

map directly to the ROP3 (raster operation) table values on

the following page. However, when source and/or pattern

transparency modes are set transparent, the additional

operations shown on the previous page must be performed

to achieve the final result.

Logical operations in the table are shown in RPN (reverse

polish notation). For example, the value 225 corresponds to

TDSoxn, the logical function of

NOT (texture XOR (source OR destination))

Notes

This command is the PCL Version of the HP-GL/2 MC

command.

This command sets the ROP value which affects not only

PCL operation but also the HP-GL/2 ROP value.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example:

The Logical Operation default value is 252 (TSo),

corresponding to a logical function of:

(texture | source)

The result is computed below for both case 1 (source

and pattern opaque) and case 4 (source and pattern

transparent) on the previous page. Note that the ROP3

value of 252 results only with case 1, when both source and

pattern transparency modes are set to opaque.

Table 2-5.

Logical Operation (ROP3)

Bits

Texture

Source

Destination

ROP3 (source & pattern are opaque)

(decimal 252)

ROP3 +Transparencies

(source & pattern are transparent)

Each column of destination, source, and texture values are

the input to the logical function. The result, 252, is the

value that would be sent to identify the logical operation

(source and pattern transparency modes are opaque). The

last row, “ROP3 + Transparencies (source & pattern are

transparent)” shows the result if source and pattern

transparency modes are transparent (the default

transparency mode).

2-18 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Logical Operations

Table 2-6, Logical Operations (ROP3), shows the mapping

between input values and their logical operations. Note

that the logical operations are specified as RPN (reverse

polish notation) equations. Here is a key to describe what

the Boolean Function values mean;

S = Source

a = AND

T = Texture

D = Destination

o = OR

n = NOT

x = EXCLUSIVE OR

Note

Since logical operations are interpreted in RGB space

(white = 1 and black = 0) rather than in CMY space

(white = 0 and black = 1), the results may not be intuitive.

For example, ORing a white object with a black object in

RGB space yields a white object. This is the same as

ANDing the two objects in CMY space. It must be remem-

bered that the printer operates in something similar to a

CMY space and inverts the bits and reverses the order.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-6.

Logical Operations (ROP3)

Boolean Function

Input Value

Boolean Function

SDTSxaxn

TSDTaox

DSTDxaxn

TDSox

DTSoon

DTSona

TSon

SDTona

DTon

TDSoan

DTSnaa

TDSxnon

TDSaon

SDTnaa

TDSxon

DTna

SDTxon

DSna

STDnaon

STxDSxa

TDSTanaxn

SDTSaox

SDTSxnox

DTSxa

TSDnaon

STna

TDSnaon

TDSonon

TSDTSaoxxn

DTSana

TDSona

DSon

SSTxTDxaxn

STDSoax

TSDnox

SDTxnon

SDTaon

DTSxnon

DTSaon

TSDTSanaxx

SSTxDSxaxn

STxTDxa

SDTSanaxn

TDSTaox

TSDTxox

TSDnoan

TSna

SDTnaon

SDTSoox

STDSaox

STDSxnox

2-20 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-6. Logical Operations (ROP3) continued

Input Value

Boolean Function

SDTox

Input Value

Boolean Function

DSTnaon

DTSDaox

STDSxaxn

DTSonon

SDToan

TSDToax

STDnox

STDSxox

STDnoan

TSx

DTSox

DTSoan

STDSonox

STDSnaox

TSan

TDSToax

DTSnox

DTx

TSDnaa

DTSDonox

DTSDxox

DTSnoan

DTSDnaox

DTan

DTSxon

SDxTDxa

STDSanaxn

SDna

DTSnaon

DSTDaox

TSDTxaxn

SDTxa

TDSxa

DSTDSaoxxn

DSTDoax

SDTnox

TDSTDaoxxn

DTSDoax

TDSnox

100

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

SDTSoax

DSTnox

DSx

SDTana

SDTSonox

DSTDSonoxxn

TDSxxn

SSTxDSxoxn

TDSTxox

TDSnoan

TDna

DTSax

TSDTSoaxxn

Printer-Specific Differences 2-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-6.

Logical Operations (ROP3) continued

Input Value

Boolean Function

SDTax

Input Value

135

136

137

138

139

140

141

142

143

144

145

146

147

148

149

150

151

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

Boolean Function

TDSaxn

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

128

129

130

131

132

133

134

TDSTDoaxxn

SDTSnoax

TDSxnan

TDSana

DSa

SDTSnaoxn

DSTnoa

DSTDxoxn

SDTnoa

SSDxTDxaxn

SDTSxox

SDTnoan

DSTDxox

DSTnoan

SDTSnaox

DSan

SDTSxoxn

SSDxTDxax

TDSanan

TDSxna

SDTSnoaxn

DTSDToaxx

STDaxn

TDSax

DSTDSoaxxn

DTSDnoax

SDTxnan

STDSnoax

DTSxnan

STxDSxo

DTSaan

TSDTSoaxx

DTSaxn

DTSxx

TSDTSonoxx

SDTSonoxn

DSxn

DTSoaxn

SDTSoaxn

STDnax

DTSaa

STxDSxon

DTSxna

DSTDoaxn

DSTDSaoxx

TDSxan

STDSnoaxn

SDTxna

TDSTnoaxn

DSTDSoaxx

DTa

TDSTnaoxn

2-22 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-6.

Logical Operations (ROP3) continued

Input Value

Boolean Function

DTSnoa

Input Value

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

210

211

Boolean Function

SDxTDxan

DTSxo

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

DTSDxoxn

TDSTonoxn

TDxn

DTSano

TSa

DSTnax

TDSToaxn

DTSoa

STDSnaoxn

STDSonoxn

TSxn

DTSoxn

STDnoa

STDSxoxn

SDTnax

TSDToaxn

SDToa

DTSono

STDSxax

DTSDaoxn

DSTnao

DTno

STDoxn

DTSDxax

STDSaoxn

TDSnoa

TDSTxoxn

SSTxDSxox

SDTanan

TSDnax

DTSDoaxn

DTSDTaoxx

SDTxan

SDTono

SDTnao

STno

TSDnoa

TSDTxoxn

TDSnax

STDSoaxn

SSTxTDxax

DTSanan

TSDTSaoxx

DTSxan

TSDTxax

DSTDaoxn

DTSnao

DSno

212

213

214

215

STDSanax

Printer-Specific Differences 2-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-6.

Logical Operations (ROP3) continued

Input Value

Boolean Function

TDSTxax

SDTSaoxn

DTSDanax

STxDSxan

STDnao

Input Value

236

Boolean Function

SDTao

SDTxno

DSo

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

237

238

239

SDTnoo

240

SDno

241

TDSono

TDSnao

TSno

SDTxo

242

SDTano

243

TDSoa

244

TSDnao

TDno

TDSoxn

245

DSTDxax

TSDTaoxn

SDTSxax

TDSTaoxn

SDTSanax

STxTDxan

SSTxDSxax

DSTDSanaxxn

DTSao

246

TDSxo

TDSano

TDSao

TDSxno

DTo

247

248

249

250

251

DTSnoo

TSo

252

253

TSDnoo

DTSoo

254

DTSxno

255

2-24 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pixel Placement

Command

This command determines how pixels are rendered in

images.

?*l # R

# = 0 - Grid intersection

1 - Grid centered

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = 0, 1 (command is ignored for other

values)

Two models are used for rendering pixels when an image is

placed on paper:

Grid Intersection Model

Grid Centered Model

This command can be invoked multiple times during a

page. It has no effect except to switch the model being used

for imaging.

Note

The PCL Pixel Placement command determines how pixels

are placed for both PCL and HP-GL/2 operation.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The example shown in Figure 2-1 illustrates the concepts

of the two models. Assume a rectangle extends from

coordinate position (1,1) to position (3,4). As shown below,

each model produces a different result. (Since PCL printers

print only at intersections, grid centered pixel placement is

implemented as shown on the right.)

Figure 2-1. Pixel Placement

The grid centered model produces a rectangle that is one

dot row thinner and one dot row shorter than the grid

intersection model. The grid intersection model is the PCL

default.

Note

The grid centered method is used by Microsoft Windows.

2-26 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Placement Variations

PCL and HP-GL/2 (see following pages for HP-GL/2 pixel

placement command description) provide two pixel

placement modes: grid intersection (the default) and grid

centered. Grid intersection places pixels on the

intersections of the grid (see Figure 2-2). Grid centered

places pixels in the center of the grid. In Figure 2-2, a

rectangle extends from position (1,1) to (3,4). The grid

centered model produces a rectangle one dot thinner and

one dot shorter then the grid intersection model.

When rectangular area fills are used and grid intersection

is used, an overlapping of pixels can occur if rectangular

area fills are placed adjacent to one another (as shown

below). Depending on the raster operation presently in

effect, this overlap can produce undesirable results in the

final printed image. To avoid this problem, use the grid

centered method.

Note

Since PCL printers print only at intersections, grid centered

is implemented as shown on the right.

Figure 2-2. Pixel Placement Variations

Printer-Specific Differences 2-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Pixel Placement

Command (HP-GL/2)

The Pixel Placement (PP) command controls how pixels are

placed on the layout grid during polygon fills. Two pixel

placement modes are grid intersection or grid centered.

P P [m od e] ;

Pixel Placement Command (HP-GL/2)

Parameter

Format

Functional Range

Default

mode

clamped integer

0 or 1

0 (grid intersection)

mode

grid intersection; device draws pixels

centered at grid intersections (see

Figure 2-1).

grid centered; device draws pixels centered

inside the boxes created by the grid (see

Figure 2-1).

The command is the HP-GL/2 version of the PCL Pixel

Placement command. Whatever mode is selected, using the

HP-GL/2 PP command also applies to PCL operation.

Likewise the PCL Pixel Placement command also affects

HP-GL/2 pixel placement.

Notes

Microsoft Windows fills polygons based on grid centered

method.

This command determines how pixels will be placed for

both HP-GL/2 and PCL operation.

The PP command is not defaulted by an IN command.

2-28 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Merge Control

Command (HP-GL/2)

The Merge Control (MC) command specifies the raster

operation (ROP’s) to be performed in HP-GL/2. Raster

Operations specify how source, destination, and patterns

are combined to produce final images. This command

supports all 256 Microsoft Windows ternary (ROP3)

raster-operation codes.

MC [m od e, [op cod e] ] ;

Merge Control Command (HP-GL/2)

Parameter

Format

Functional Range

0 or 1

Default

0 (ROP 252)

168, 252

mode

clamped integer

opcode

0...255¹

¹For opcode ROP values refer to Table 2-6, Logical Operation.

mode

opcode value is ignored; printer sets ROP to 252.

opcode value is used as the ROP value. If no

opcode value is sent, printer sets ROP to 168. If

opcode is out of range (some value other then

0-255), the command is ignored and the default

ROP of 252 is used. (For example: MC1,60;

MC1,60-; MC1,+60; MC1,60+; all set the ROP to

60; however, MC1,-60; or MC1,300; set the ROP

to the default value (252).

Notes

This command is the HP-GL/2 version of the PCL Logical

Operation command.

This command sets a ROP value which affects not only

HP-GL/2 operation but also the PCL ROP value.

The MC command is defaulted by an IN command.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note

When using the MC command, some pattern types will not

produce the expected ROP result. This only occurs when

using the FT (Fill Type) command pattern types 1, 2, 3, and

4, and the ROP includes an XOR operation. (This problem

is due to the fact that these patterns are the result of a

vector operation and do not produce raster data for use by a

ROP operation.) All other Fill Type command patterns

(types, 10, 11, 21, or 22) operate as expected.

opcode

The operation code (opcode) specifies the logical operations

that are performed on a source, destination, and patterned

image prior to drawing the final image. The opcodes are

created by listing all possible combinations of a single

pattern, source and destination pixel, and constructing the

desired final pixel values. The following table shows three

common opcodes (also see Table 2-6).

Table 2-7.

Common Opcodes

Pixel Combinations

Desired Destination Values

Pattern Pixel Source Pixel Destination

Pixel

Source

Overwrite

Transparency

(TR

Source

Destination

command)

Resulting Opcode

204 (0xCC)

238 (0xEE)

102 (0x66)

2-30 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 4P

and 4MP Printers

The HP LaserJ et 4P printer is the follow-on to the HP

LaserJ et IIIP printer. The HP LaserJ et 4MP printer is the

multi-platform (PostScript) version of the 4P printer. PCL

operation and the internal fonts in these two printers are

identical to that of the HP LaserJ et 4ML printer. The 4P

and 4MP printers have a control panel unlike the 4L and

4ML printers. Refer to Table 1-1, PCL Feature Support

Matrix, for the commands these printers support and to

Chapter 3, “Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,” for

font support information.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-31

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 4PJ

Printer

The HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer is a modified version of the

HP LaserJ et 4P printer designed specifically for the

J apanese market. The enhanced PCL 5 printer language in

this printer includes all of the PCL 5 features of the HP

LaserJ et 4P, plus special features which specifically support

the Asian printing market. These features include large

font support, support for vertical printing, and the ESC/P

printer language. Table 2-8 lists the PCL feature additions

for this printer.

Table 2-8.

PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 4PJ

Feature

Status

Comments

Text Parsing Method Command

New

Provides a method for specifying character

codes to select characters in large fonts (> 256

characters).

Character Text Path Direction Command

Font Header Format

New

Allows vertical printing for Asian markets,

which use both horizontal and vertical printing.

Modified

Adds Font Format 16, a font header which

supports large TrueType fonts. Five new font

header segments are supported.

Fonts

New Additions

and Deletions

The resident typefaces are different than those

in the HP LaserJ et 4P printer. Two large fonts

(fonts containing a large number of characters)

are included to support the J apanese market:

MS Mincho and MS Gothic. The printer also

contains some Western TrueType typefaces

(Arial and Times Roman families). The printer

does not have any Intellifont typefaces except

the Courier family.

Page Size Command

New Additions

New

Adds support for J IS B5 paper (?&l45A) and

two J apanese postcard sizes: Hagaki (?&l71A)

and Oufuku-Hagaki (?&l72A).

Character Enhancements

Allows pseudo-bold and pseudo-italic

enhancements to be applied to MS Mincho, MS

Gothic, and certain downloaded TrueType fonts.

2-32 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Descriptions of the Text Parsing Method Command,

Character Text Path Direction Command, and Font Format

16 are provided in the following paragraphs. Following

that, a “LaserJ et 4PJ Programming Tips” section offers

examples and tips for performing specific tasks using PCL 5.

Text Parsing Method

Command

The Text Parsing Method command informs the PCL parser

whether character codes should be interpreted as 1-byte or

2-byte character codes as described below.

?& t # P

# = 0, 1 - All character codes are processed as

one-byte characters.

21 - Character codes are processed as one-byte

or two-byte characters as described below.

31 - Character codes are processed as one-byte

or two-byte characters as described below.

38 - Character codes are processed as one-byte

or two-byte characters as described below.

Defa u lt = 0 or 31 (if the default symbol set is

WIN31J , the value is 31; otherwise it is 0)

Ra n ge = 0, 1, 21, 31, 38

If the value field is 21, character codes in the range

0x21-0xFF are processed as the first byte of a two-byte

character. The following byte is processed as the second

byte of the two-byte character. All character codes outside

this range are processed as one-byte values. This method

can be used for parsing characters in Asian seven-bit

encoding specifications, including J IS X0208 (J apan), GB

2312-80 (China), and KS C 5601-1992 (Korea).

If the value field is 31, character codes in the range

0x81-0x9F and 0xE0-0xFC are processed as the first byte of

a two-byte character. The following byte is processed as the

second byte of the two-byte character. All character codes

outside this range are processed as one-byte values. This

Printer-Specific Differences 2-33

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

method can be used for parsing characters in the Shift-J IS

encoding specification.

If the value field is 38, character codes in the range

0x80-0xFF are processed as the first byte of a two-byte

character. The following byte is processed as the second

byte of the two-byte character. All character codes outside

this range are processed as one-byte values. This

method can be used for parsing Asian eight-bit encoding

specifications, such as the Big Five and TCA encoding

specifications (Taiwan), and KS C 5601-1992 and GB

2312-80, which can be either 7 or 8 bit.

Character Text Path

Direction Command

This command allows the user to vertically rotate text for

use in vertical writing applications.

?& c # T

# = 0 - Horizontal printing

–1 - Vertical rotated printing

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = 0, 1

Using ?&c0T, the printer ’s current active position (CAP)

advances left to right, and linefeed advances top to bottom

with horizontal, upright characters.

Using ?&c–1T, the following actions occur:

Full-width characters in large fonts are rotated

counter-clockwise 90 degrees (“vertical rotated”

characters).

Vertical substitutes are made for characters which

change their appearance, orientation, or positioning

when written vertically.

All other characters are unaffected by this setting.

The vertical-rotated printing mode (?&c-1T) has the

effect of transforming a portrait page with horizontal

text into a landscape page with vertical text. The PCL

Print Direction command can be used to achieve other

text orientations.

2-34 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical substitution characters are those characters which

change their appearance, orientation, or positioning when

written vertically. Examples in J apanese fonts include

parentheses, brackets, punctuation and small kana. In the

example above, the two small characters are replaced with

vertical substitutes. Vertical substitution characters are

accessed through the Vertical Substitutes Character

Segment, which is described in more detail later in this

chapter.

Font Header

Format 16

The HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer provides support for large

fonts. Large fonts, such as the MS Mincho and MS Gothic

fonts supplied in the printer, are fonts which are bound to

large symbol sets. The LaserJ et 4PJ printer supports a new

font header to accomodate large bound fonts. New segments

are provided for support of vertical substitutes, galley

characters, typeface strings, and character enhancements.

The Font Header Command, described beginning on page

11-6 of the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference

Manual, has several different header formats. The support

of large fonts adds Font Header Format 16 (Universal Font

Header). Font Header Format 16 is identical in structure to

format 15 (Universal Scalable Font Header) except that the

size field for data segments has been enlarged from 16 bits

to 32 bits, and a new Font Type has been added for large

fonts (Font Type 3).

Printer-Specific Differences 2-35

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

New Font Format

Header Segments

For the HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer, Font Header Format 15

has been extended to include optional data segments for

supporting galley characters, typeface strings, and

character enhancements. Font Format 16 supports these

segments plus optional segments for supporting vertical

substitution and a vertical rotation offset. (Segmented Font

Data is described beginning on page 11-45 of the PCL 5

Printer Language Technical Reference Manual.)

Galley Character Segment

If an application requests a character that does not exist

within the current font, the printer checks the Galley

Character Segment for a substitute character to print.

Vertical Substitution Character Segment

The Vertical Substitution Character Segment is used to

identify vertical substitute glyphs for characters which

change their appearance, orientation, or positioning when

written vertically.

Typeface String Segment

The Typeface String Segment allows names of permanent

downloaded fonts to be displayed, using non-Latin

characters, in the appropriate typeface on the Typeface List.

Vertical Rotation Segment

When the character text path direction is set to vertical

rotation, full-width characters are rotated counter-clockwise

90°. The Vertical Rotation Segment sets the point around

which the character rotates, so that character alignment is

compatible with the way Windows 3.1J rotates characters.

Character Enhancement Segment

The HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer can apply pseudo-bold and

pseudo-italic enhancements to MS Mincho, MS Gothic, and

certain downloaded TrueType fonts. This segment is used to

indicate that a particular downloaded font is able to have

these character enhancements applied.

2-36 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-9.

Printer Segment Support for Font Format 16

Segment

LJ 4PJ LJ 4V/ LJ 4LC LJ 4LJ DJ 1600 LJ 5P

4MV

Pro

✓

Galley Character – GC

Vertical Substitution – VT

Typeface string – TF

✓

Vertical Rotation – VR

✓

Character Enhancement – CE

Bitmap Resolution – BR *

✓

TrueType fonts

Bitmap fonts *

ns – not supported

Format 16 bitmap font support is described beginning on page 2-63.

Description of Font

Header Segments

Each font header data segment contains three parts:

Segment Identifier

Data Segment Size

Data Segment

Segment Identifier Values

The Segment Identifier Values for the Galley Character,

Vertical Substitution Character, Typeface String, Vertical

Rotation, and Character Enhancement Segments are as

shown in the following table.

Value

18243

22100

21574

22098

17221

Mnemonic*

Data Segment

Galley Character Segment

Vertical Substitute Segment

Typeface String Segment

Vertical Rotation Segment

Character Enhancement Segment

* The mnemonic is obtained when the two bytes of this big-endian word are treated as

ASCII characters.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-37

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Data Segment Size

The Data Segment Size indicates the number of bytes in

the immediately following Data Segment. The size of this

field is 4 bytes for Font Format 16 fonts, and 2 bytes for

Font Format 15 fonts. The rest of the data segments are

identical for both font formats.

Galley Character Segment

If an application requests a character that does not exist

within the current font, the printer checks the Galley

Character Segment for a substitute character to print

instead. The Galley Character Segment specifies the

character codes of the substitute characters to be printed.

A different galley character can be specified for different

regions of the symbol set. For example, this segment can

be set up so that an asterisk prints when a non-existent

character is selected in the region 0x81 - 0x9F, and a

question mark for characters in the region 0xE0-0xFC.

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Byte

GC (18243)

Data Segment Size (6*n+6) *

Format = 0

Default Galley Character

Number of Regions (n)

. . .

Region #1 Upper Left Character Code

Region #1 Lower Right Character Code

Region #1 Galley Character

. . .

6*n+7

6*n+6 Region #n Upper Left Character Code

6*n+8 Region #n Lower Right Character Code 6*n+9

6*n+10 Region #n Galley Character 6*n+11

* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16

fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data

Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.

2-38 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Defa u lt Ga lley Ch a r a cter (UI). Character code of the

character to be printed when a specified character is not

within any of the defined regions.

Nu m ber of Region s (UI). Number of regions for which

galley characters are defined. Regions are defined for a

table in which the first character code byte specifies the

row and the second byte specifies the column.

Region #x Up p er Left Ch a r a cter Cod e (UI).

Character code defining upper left corner of Region #x.

Region #x Low er Righ t Ch a r a cter Cod e (UI).

Character code defining lower right corner of Region #x.

Region #x Ga lley Ch a r a cter (UI). Character code of

the character to be printed when a character within

Region #x is missing from the selected font.

If the value of the galley character field is 0xFFFF, then if

the font contains a missing character glyph, that glyph is

printed. The missing character glyph can be downloaded

using the PCL Download Character command with a

character code = 0xFFFF and a glyph ID = 0.

If both the character specified by the original character code

and by the galley character code are missing, the CAP is

advanced in accordance with previous PCL rules for

missing characters, that is, it is advanced according to the

current setting of HMI (Horizontal Motion Index).

The Galley Character Segment will be invalid if the format

number is not supported or if the segment size declared in

the Segment Size field is larger or smaller than required for

the number of regions (N). If the segment is invalid, the

font download will be ignored.

Galley Character Segments can be downloaded with any

Font Format 15 or 16 font, regardless of font type.

The Galley Character Segment can be used to implement a

requirement of the Microsoft Windows Version 3.1, J apanese

Version, Microsoft Standard Character Set Specification

(March 11, 1993), which states “when there is an output

request for a character of a specified typeface, even if the

glyph corresponding to the specified character code does not

Printer-Specific Differences 2-39

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

exist, some glyph data will be output. For double-byte

characters, the glyph of the default character defined for

the given TrueType font is used. For single-byte characters,

the glyph at 0xA5 (small dot, U+FF65) is used.”

The following table shows a Galley Character Segment

which follows the J apanese Windows specification.

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Byte

GC (18243)

Data Segment Size (12) *

Format = 0

Default Galley Character = 0xFFFF

Number of Regions (n) = 1

Region #1 Upper Left

Character Code = 0x0000

Region #1 Lower Right

Character Code = 0x00FF

Region #1 Galley Character = 0x00A5

* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16

fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data

Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.

In this example segment, there is one galley character

region. This region is applied to all one-byte characters

(character codes 0x0000-0x00FF); any missing character in

this region is replaced with the character at character code

location 0x00A5. Any missing characters falling into this

region (e.g. character codes 0x0100 - 0xFFFF) are replaced

with the default galley character. Since in this example the

Default Galley Character field = 0xFFFF, the missing

character glyph is printed if it is present in the font.

2-40 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Substitution Segment

The Vertical Substitution Segment contains pairs of glyph

IDs. Each pair specifies the horizontal and vertical glyph ID

for a character. The segment can be built directly from a

TrueType mort table which contains a vertical substitution

array. The segment definition is shown in the table below.

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Byte

VT (22100)

Data Segment Size (4*n+4) *

Horizontal Glyph ID #1

Vertical Glyph ID #1

. . .

4*n+2 Horizontal Glyph ID #n

4*n+4 Vertical Glyph ID #n

4*n+3

4*n+5

4*n+7

4*n+9

4*n+6 End of table mark #1 = 0xFFFF

4*n+8 End of table mark #2 = 0xFFFF

The Horizontal Glyph ID field is used by TrueType as an ID

number for the horizontal glyph data associated with a

given character. The Vertical Glyph ID field contains the ID

number for the vertical glyph data associated with the

same character.

The vertical glyphs can be downloaded using the PCL

Character Definition Command using a character code =

0xFFFF.

A TrueType mort table typically contains a header of 76

bytes, followed by the vertical substitution array which

follows the segment format described here. However, the

mort table header is designed to be variable-length, and the

location of the vertical substitution data may be located

elsewhere in mort tables in future fonts.

If the Font Type is not Type 3 (16-bit fonts), this data

segment is ignored.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-41

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the value pairs are not sorted by horizontal glyph ID, the

data segment is invalid. If the End of Table mark #1 is not

0xFFFF, the data segment is invalid. The location of the

end of the table is determined using the Data Segment Size

field. If the segment is invalid, the font download is ignored.

Typeface String Segment

The purpose of this segment is to provide a substitute

string to print for a permanent downloaded font when doing

a PCL Typeface List printout. It has the following structure:

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Byte

TF (21574)

Data Segment Size (2*n+2) *

Embedded Font

Name Flag

Substitute String

Length (n)

Substitute String Character List

. . .

* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16

fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data

Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.

Embedded Font Name Flag (UB)—A zero value in this field

is used to indicate that the ASCII name of the font (from

the Font Name field) should be printed in addition to the

substitute string. A non-zero value is used to indicate that

only the substitute string should be printed.

Substitute String Length (UB)—the number of UI

characters in the Substitute String Character List.

Substitute String Character List (array of UI)—the

characters which make up the substitute string. Each

character is represented as a UI value. If the font is a

bound font, then the values are accessed by their

character codes values; if the font is unbound, then the

Unicode index numbers (see Appendix D) are used.

2-42 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Typeface String Segment will be invalid if the Data

Segment Size declared in the Data Segment Size field is

larger or smaller than required for substitute string length,

or if the Data Segment Size is an odd number of bytes. If

the segment is invalid, the font download will be ignored.

Typeface String Segments can be downloaded with any

Font Format 15 or Font Format 16 font, regardless of font

type.

The following tables are examples of Typeface String

Segments for two downloaded fonts. The first is for MS

Mincho, and has the embedded font name flag set to true.

The second is for MS Gothic, and has the embedded font

name flag set to false.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-43

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MS Mincho

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Byte

TF (21574)

Data Segment

Size (10) *

Embedded Font

Name Flag = 1

Substitute String

Length = 4

Substitute String Character List =

0x826c

0x8272

0x96be

0x92a9

(Note: these are full-width

Shift-J IS character codes

for “MS” and Kanji

“Mincho” )

MS Gothic

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Byte

TF (21574)

Data Segment

Size (14) *

Embedded Font

Name Flag = 0

Substitute String

Length = 6

Substitute String Character List =

0x826c

0x8272

0x8353

0x8356

0x8362

0x834e

(Note: these are full-width

Shift-J IS character codes

for “MS” and Katakana for

“Gothic” )

* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16

fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data

Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.

2-44 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following illustration shows how the PCL Typeface List

would look.

Vertical Rotation Segment

The Vertical Rotation Segment is used to define the lower

boundary of the rotation box used when the character text

path direction is set to vertical rotation. This is an optional

segment which may be downloaded with Font Format 16

TrueType fonts.

The following illustration shows an example of character

rotation. The boxes around each character represent the

vertical rotation box. The distance between the baseline

and the bottom of the character box is represented by the

Descender value in the Vertical Rotation Segment.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-45

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The structure of the Vertical Rotation Segment is:

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Byte

VR (22098)

Data Segment Size (4) *

Format (0)

Descender value

* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16

fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data

Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.

Format (UINT16)—Set this value to 0.

Descender Value (SINT16)—Set this value to equal the

“sTypoDescender” value from the “OS/2” table of the

TrueType font.

2-46 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

If the Vertical Rotation Segment is not downloaded with

the font definition, a default value is used for the

Descender value. The default value is set to the following:

Descender value = -36/256 * ScaleFactor

Where: ScaleFactor is Bytes 64 and 65 from the

Font Format 16 Font Header.

Character Enhancement Segment

This segment indicates whether the pseudo-bold or

pseudo-italic enhancements can be performed on a

downloaded font.

The structure of the Character Enhancement Segment is:

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Byte

CE (17221)

Data Segment Size (8)

Style

Stroke Weight

Reserved

* This segment is for Font Format 16. The Data Segment Size field for Font Format 16

fonts is 4 bytes; the segment for Font Format 15 fonts is identical except the Data

Segment Size field is 2 bytes instead.

Style (UINT32)—This field specifies the style types that

the printer is allowed to perform on the font characters.

Reserved

Posture

Bit Positions (#) = Posture

1 = Italics

0, 2, 3 = Reserved

Printer-Specific Differences 2-47

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Stroke Weight (UINT16)—This field specifies the stroke

weights which the printer is allowed to provide using the

pseudo-bold enhancement algorithm.

Stroke weight

Bit Position (#) = Stroke Weight

0 = Reserved

1 = Ultra Thin

2 = Extra Thin

3 = Thin

8 = “Book” or “Text” Weight

9 = Semi-Bold

10 = Demi-Bold

11 = Bold

4 = Extra Light

5 = Light

12 = Extra Bold

13 = Black

6 = Demi Light

7 = Semi Light

14 = Extra Black

15 = Ultra Black

Note

Only stroke weights greater than the stroke weight of the

font can be provided using the pseudo-bold enhancement

algorithm.

2-48 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 4PJ

Programming Tips

This section provides programming tips concerning specific

considerations for the HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer. This

section covers general print job initialization, font metric

calculation, vertical writing, and other issues which are

pertinent to printing J apanese text on the HP LaserJ et 4PJ

printer using PCL 5.

General Print Job Initialization

This example demonstrates the general print job

initialization procedure for the HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer,

which is slightly different than that used for other HP

LaserJ et printers.

Output from pre-LaserJ et 4PJ PCL drivers (for example, a

HP LaserJ et 4P driver) will only print correctly on the HP

LaserJ et 4PJ printer if the default PCL symbol set is set to

a value other than the J apanese Windows 3.1 (Win3.1J )

symbol set. This is because the default PCL text parsing

method is set based on the default PCL symbol set. When

the default PCL symbol set is set to Win3.1J , the default

text parsing method is Shift-J IS parsing; for any other

value, such as Roman-8, the default text parsing method is

1-byte parsing. To set the default PCL symbol set value, use

PJ L or the control panel.

The first example given here is nearly identical to the

initialization used for other HP LaserJ et 4 family printers.

The only difference is that it includes a PJ L command to set

the default PCL symbol set to Roman-8.

?%-12345X@PJL<CR><LF>

@PJL SET RESOLUTION=600<CR><LF>

@PJL PAGEPROTECT=OFF<CR><LF>

@PJL RET=MEDIUM<CR><LF>

@PJL COMMENT *** This command is added ***

@PJL SET LPARM:PCL SYMSET=ROMAN8<CR><LF>

@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL<CR><LF>

?E?&l1x1s1h2a0o8c6e54F?&a5L?(0U?(s1p9vs3b41

~01T

The commands in the above example are explained in more

detail in the PCL 5 and PJ L technical reference manuals.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-49

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The second example given here initializes a PCL 5 print job

for printing J apanese text. The major differences from the

previous example are that it specifies A4 paper, initializes

the text parsing method to Shift-J IS, selects Win3.1J as the

primary symbol set, selects MS-Mincho as the primary font.

?%-12345X@PJL<CR><LF>

@PJL SET RESOLUTION=600<CR><LF>

@PJL PAGEPROTECT=OFF<CR><LF>

@PJL RET=MEDIUM<CR><LF>

@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL<CR><LF>

?E?&l1x1h26a0o8c6e60F?&a5L?&t31P?(19K

~?(s1p10v0s0b28752T

The last line (2 lines, as shown) in the above example is a

PCL 5 initialization string. This set of commands resets the

printer, specifies 1 copy, specifies the paper tray as a paper

source, chooses A4-size paper, selects portrait orientation,

VMI=8 (6LPI), sets top margin to 6 lines, selects a text

length of 60 lines, a 5-column left margin, Shift-J IS

parsing, WIN3.1J symbol set, and a proportional, 10-point,

upright, text-weight MS-Mincho font.

After the PCL print data, the following commands would be

used to complete the job:

?E?%-12345X

Font Metric Calculation

Accurate character placement relies on the ability to predict

character width and height. As a character ’s point size

changes, so does its width and height. (CAP displacement,

the distance the CAP moves for vertically rotated text, is a

full-width calculation.)

In proportionally spaced fonts, character widths also vary

from character to character within the font. Variable

character widths add complexity to maintaining accurate

line widths, page breaks, or WYSIWYG operation. To

support most proportionally spaced fonts, font metrics

must be extracted from the font metric files.

2-50 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

In the MS-Mincho and MS-Gothic fonts provided in the HP

LaserJ et 4PJ , font metric calculation is somewhat easier

than for the Latin-based fonts. Width calculations are

easier because all characters of these fonts conform to one

of two different character widths at a particular point size.

The characters are either considered full-width or half-

width. One-byte characters are always half-width and

two-byte characters are always full-width.

Full-width characters occupy the entire EM width at a

particular point size. Half-width characters occupy half of

an EM width. The following equations show how to

calculate the EM width and character widths for a

full-width and a half-width character.

ppem = round (DeviceResolution * PointSize/ 72)

FullWidthDeltaX = round (ppem * PCLUnits/ DeviceResolution)

HalfWidthDeltaX=round ((ppem/ 2) * PCLUnits/ DeviceResolution)

where:

ppem = EM width in pixels

DeviceResolution = current device resolution in dots per inch

(600 or 300dpi)

PointSize = point size requested

FullWidthDeltaX = character width of full-width character in PCL

Units

HalfWidthDeltaX = character width of half-width character in PCL

Units

PCLUnits = PCL Units

The PCL Unit of measure is explained in more detail in the

PCL 5 Technical Reference Manual. The default PCL Unit

size is 1/300th of an inch, but the Unit of Measure command

can be used to set the PCL Unit size to other values.

Note that HalfWidthDeltaX may not be exactly half of

FullWidthDeltaX because of rounding. For example, if

FullWidthDeltaX = round(99.0) = 99, then the

corresponding HalfWidthDeltaX = round(99.0/2) =

round(49.5) = 50.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-51

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Character Enhancements

The HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer supports PCL pseudo-bold

and pseudo-italic character enhancements. These

enhancements can be applied to the internal MS-Mincho

and MS-Gothic fonts. They can also be applied to a

TrueType soft font if a suitable “Character Enhancement”

Segment is downloaded with the font header.

The enhancements are selected using PCL font selection

commands. The pseudo-italic enhancement can be selected

using the Style command. The pseudo-bold enhancement

can be selected using the Stroke Weight command. The bold

levels which can be applied to the internal MS-Mincho and

MS-Gothic fonts are Semi Bold, Demi Bold, Bold, and Extra

Bold. For example, to select a 10-point, Extra Bold, Italic,

MS-Mincho font, use the following PCL command:

?(19K?(s1p10v1s4b28752T

In the above command, Italics style (1s) and Extra Bold

weight (4b) are selected. Since there is not an Extra Bold

Italic MS-Mincho font resident in the printer, pseudo-italics

and pseudo-bolding algorithms are applied to characters

printed from the regular MS-Mincho font.

If a soft font is selected using the “Font Selection by ID”

command (e.g. ?(#X ), the font is selected without any

character enhancements applied. To select a soft font by ID

with character enhancements, first select the font by ID,

then select the desired attributes. For example, assume a

soft font is downloaded with ID = 1 and a Character

Enhancement Segment indicating that pseudo-bold and

pseudo-italics character enhancements can be applied. The

following command can be used to select that font with

those enhancements:

?(1X?(s1s3B

Other font effects, such as character shadowing, strike-

through, and gray-shading can be accomplished using the

print model.

2-52 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note

HP-GL/2 as implemented in HP LaserJ et printers has no

mechanism for parsing 2-byte characters. Therefore,

HP-GL/2 character transformations (e.g. SI and SR

commands) cannot be applied to these characters.

Vertical Writing

Vertical writing can be accomplished using the vertical

rotated (“-1”) mode of the Character Text Path command

(?&c-1T). When using a vertical rotated text path

direction, full-width characters are rotated and printed “on

their sides.” All other characters are unaffected and the

CAP is still advanced in the horizontal direction. The “-1”

mode has the effect of transforming a portrait page with

horizontal full-width characters into a landscape page with

vertical full-width characters. This can be combined with

the Print Direction command (?&a#P) to achieve the

desired text orientation (e.g. portrait, landscape, reverse

portrait, or reverse landscape).

An example of horizontal and vertical rotated writing is

shown below. The first line of text is horizontal writing and

the second line is vertical rotated writing. Note that the “~”

character is replaced with a vertical substitute on the

second line. The C program that follows was used to

generate the PCL commands for this example.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-53

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

#include <stdio.h>

#include <fcntl.h>

#define MONTH

#define DAY1

#define TILDE

#define DAY2

"\202P\202P\214\216"

"\202P\202U\223\372"

"\201\140"

"\202P\202V\223\372"

#define KANJITXT MONTH DAY1 TILDE MONTH DAY2

FILE *prn;

main()

{

int point_size=24;

prn = fopen("lpt1","wb");

/* open lpt1 for writing */

fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X"); /* send UEL to get to PJL */

fprintf(prn,"@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL\n");

/* Enter PCL */

fprintf(prn,"\33E");

/* send an esc E to reset printer */

/* left margin */

fprintf(prn,"\33&a4L");

fprintf(prn,"\33&t31P");

fprintf(prn,"\33(19K");

/* text parsing = Shift-JIS */

/* symbol set = Win3.1J */

fprintf(prn,"\33(s1p%dv0s0b28752T",point_size); /* MS-Mincho */

fprintf(prn,"\n\n\n\r" KANJITXT); /* print horizontal version */

fprintf(prn,"\33&c-1T");

fprintf(prn,"\n\n\n\r" KANJITXT);

fprintf(prn,"\f");

/* select vertical writing */

/* print vertical version */

/* formfeed */

fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X");

/* send UEL to get to PJL */

}

Printing Ruby Characters (Furigana)

Ruby characters, also known in J apanese as furigana,

are small characters typically used as an aid in kanji

pronunciation. Ruby characters are usually (but not

always) hiragana. They are generally placed above the

corresponding kanji in horizontal writing and to the right

in vertical writing. Ruby characters can be generated using

font scaling and cursor positioning commands.

An example of ruby characters is shown below. In this

example, the ruby characters are printed at one-third the

size of the kanji. The C program that follows was used to

generate the PCL commands for this example.

2-54 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

#include <stdio.h>

#include <fcntl.h>

#define KANJITXT "\225\127\226\173"

#define RUBYTXT "\202\320\202\345\202\244 \202\331\202\361 "

FILE *prn;

main()

{

int point_size=72;

prn = fopen("lpt1","wb");

/* open lpt1 for writing */

/* send UEL to get to PJL */

fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X");

fprintf(prn,"@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL\n");

/* Enter PCL */

fprintf(prn,"\33E");

/* EscE to reset printer */

/* text parsing = Shift-JIS */

/* symbol set = Win3.1J */

fprintf(prn,"\33&t31P");

fprintf(prn,"\33(19K");

fprintf(prn,"\33(s1p%dv0s0b28752T",point_size); /* MS-Mincho */

fprintf(prn,"\33*p300x400Y");

fprintf(prn,KANJITXT);

/* set cursor position */

/* print kanji characters */

fprintf(prn,"\33(s%dV",point_size/3); /*furigana point size */

fprintf(prn,"\33*p300x%dY",400-4*point_size);/*cursor position*/

fprintf(prn,RUBYTXT);

fprintf(prn,"\f");

/* print ruby characters */

/* formfeed */

fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X");

/* send UEL to get to PJL */

}

Printer-Specific Differences 2-55

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Underlining

In J apanese writing, vertical underlines are placed to the

right of vertical columns of text. This can be accomplished

in PCL 5 using the Fill Rectangular Area command.

An underline is simply a long thin black-filled box. The

length of the underline depends on the length of the text to

be underlined.

An example of vertical underlining is shown below. The C

program that follows was used to generate the PCL

commands for this example.

2-56 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

#include <stdio.h>

#include <fcntl.h>

#define MONTH

#define DAY1

#define TILDE

#define DAY2

"\202P\202P\214\216"

"\202P\202U\223\372"

"\201\140"

"\202P\202V\223\372"

#define KANJITXT MONTH DAY1 TILDE MONTH DAY2

FILE *prn;

main()

{

int point_size=24;

prn = fopen("lpt1","wb");

/* open lpt1 for writing */

/* send UEL to get to PJL */

/* Enter PCL */

fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X");

fprintf(prn,"@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL\n");

fprintf(prn,"\33E");

/* Esc E to reset printer */

/* text parsing = Shift-JIS */

/* symbol set = Win3.1J */

/* print direction = 270 */

/* set CAP position */

fprintf(prn,"\33&t31P");

fprintf(prn,"\33(19K");

fprintf(prn,"\33&a270P");

fprintf(prn,"\33*p500x1300Y");

fprintf(prn,"\33(s1p%dv0s0b28752T",point_size); /* MS-Mincho */

fprintf(prn,"\33&c-1T");

fprintf(prn, KANJITXT);

/* select vertical writing */

/* print vertical text */

fprintf(prn,"\33*p500x%dY",1300-point_size*4); /* set CAP for

underline*/

/* draw underline */

fprintf(prn,"\33*c%da3b0P",300 * strlen(KANJITXT)/2 *

point_size/72);

fprintf(prn,"\f");

/* formfeed */

fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X");

/* send UEL to get to PJL */

}

Printer-Specific Differences 2-57

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Clusters

Vertical clusters are groups of two or three narrow

characters side-by-side in a vertical line of text. Vertical

clusters containing half-width characters can be created

by using a combination of print direction and cursor

positioning commands.

An example of vertical clusters is shown below. The C

program that follows was used to generate the PCL

commands for this example. In this example, two half-

width characters (e.g. 2-digit numbers) were printed as

vertical clusters.

2-58 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

#include <stdio.h>

#include <fcntl.h>

#define MONTH

#define TILDE

#define DAY

"\214\216"

"\201\140"

"\223\372"

#define CLUSTER "\201\100\033&f0S\033&a0P%s%d\033&a270P\033&f1S"

FILE *prn;

main()

{

int point_size=24;

int offset;

char OFFSET[40];

prn = fopen("lpt1","wb");

offset = ( 36 * point_size * 300) /

/* ---- ----------

( 256 * 72

/* open lpt1 for writing */

);

sprintf(OFFSET,"\33*p-%dx-%dY",offset,offset);

place cluster */

/* used to

fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X");

/* send UEL to get to PJL */

/* Enter PCL */

fprintf(prn,"@PJL ENTER LANGUAGE=PCL\n");

fprintf(prn,"\33E");

/* Esc E to reset printer */

/* text parsing = Shift-JIS */

/* symbol set = Win3.1J */

/* print direction = 270 */

/* set CAP position */

fprintf(prn,"\33&t31P");

fprintf(prn,"\33(19K");

fprintf(prn,"\33&a270P");

fprintf(prn,"\33*p500x1300Y");

fprintf(prn,"\33(s1p%dv0s0b28752T",point_size); /* MS-Mincho */

fprintf(prn,"\33&c-1T"); /* select vertical writing mode */

fprintf(prn, CLUSTER MONTH, OFFSET, 11);

fprintf(prn, CLUSTER DAY, OFFSET, 16);

fprintf(prn, TILDE);

/* print month */

/* print day */

/* print tilde */

/* print month */

/* print day */

/* formfeed */

fprintf(prn, CLUSTER MONTH, OFFSET, 11);

fprintf(prn, CLUSTER DAY, OFFSET, 17);

fprintf(prn,"\f");

fprintf(prn,"\33%%-12345X");

/* send UEL to get to PJL */

}

Printer-Specific Differences 2-59

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper Size

Three new paper sizes were added to the HP LaserJ et 4PJ

printer. These paper sizes include: J IS B5, Hagaki, and

Oufuku-hagaki. The logical page size in dots per inch are

shown in the table below. See page 1-26 in this manual and

pages 2-9 to 2-10 in the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical

Reference Manual for an explanation of these values.

DIMENSIONS

(at 300 DPI - double for 600 DPI)

PAPER SIZE

Portrait Dimensions

JIS B5

2149

1181

1748

3035

1748

2362

2007

1039

1606

3035

1748

2362

150

Hagaki

150

Oufuku-hagaki

Landscape Dimensions

JIS B5

3035

1748

2362

2149

1181

1748

2917

1630

2244

2149

1181

1748

150

Hagaki

Oufuku-hagaki

HP LaserJet 4 Plus

and 4M Plus

Printers

HP LaserJ et 4 Plus and 4M Plus printers are

performance-enhanced follow-on products for HP LaserJ et 4

and 4M printers, respectively. The HP LaserJ et 4M Plus

printer is the multi-platform (PostScript) version of the

LaserJ et 4 Plus printer.

In addition to extra speed, these printers also have the

following added features which are not controlled using

PCL:

Memory Enhancement technology (MEt), which uses

memory-saving techniques to better utilize available

memory (refer to Chapter 5 “Memory Usage” for

additional information). MEt is not controlled using PCL.

Resource saving, as in the LaserJ et 4Si printer. Resource

saving allows saving information for the current

language (PCL or PostScript) when switching to another

2-60 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

language. If resource saving is enabled, all the

permanent fonts, macros, and user-defined patterns plus

other miscellaneous data is saved in a reserved portion of

printer memory. This data is stored until the language is

enabled again. When the language is re-enabled, the

stored data is made available for use. Resource saving is

enabled from the control panel or using PJ L—no PCL

commands are required for this operation.

EconoMode, a feature supported by HP LaserJ et 4L and

4P printers, allows the user to reduce the amount of

toner used by removing about 75% of the dots from the

printed page. EconoMode is selected using PJ L or from

the control panel—it is not controlled using PCL.

Powersave mode, which minimizes power consumption

when the printer is sitting idle. The amount of idle time

required before the printer goes into powersave mode is

configurable using the control panel or PJ L.

PCL operation in these two printers is almost identical to

that of HP LaserJ et 4 and 4M printers, except HP LaserJ et

4 Plus and 4M Plus printers support Logical Operations

(ROP3) as explained in the HP LaserJ et 4ML printer

section in this chapter. In addition, the internal fonts in

HP LaserJ et Plus and 4M Plus printers support the Latin 2

and Latin 5 symbol sets for all typefaces (in the HP

LaserJ et 4, 4M, 4Si, and 4SiMx, only 15 of the 35 Intellifont

typefaces support these symbol sets). Refer to Table 1-1,

PCL Feature Support Matrix, for the commands these

printers support and to Chapter 3, “Internal

Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,” for font support

information.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-61

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 4V

and 4MV Printers

HP LaserJ et 4V and 4MV printers print at speeds up to 16

pages per minute and handle many paper sizes including

11"x17" paper. The HP LaserJ et 4MV is the multi-platform

(PostScript) version of the HP LaserJ et 4V printer.

The HP LaserJ et 4V/4MV PCL 5 feature set is similar to

that of the HP LaserJ et 4 Plus/4M Plus printers, with the

addition of wide format media support. As an option, the

printer can also support J apanese printing as does the HP

LaserJ et 4PJ printer, including the following PCL

enhancements:

Font header support for large bitmap fonts

Text parsing method

Character text path direction

J apanese media/postcard support

J apanese fonts (large fonts)

As with HP LaserJ et 4Plus and 4M Plus printers, the

LaserJ et 4V and 4MV printers support the following added

features which are not controlled using PCL:

Memory Enhancement technology (MEt)

Resource saving

EconoMode

Powersave mode

Refer to Table 1-1, the PCL Feature Support Matrix, for

the commands these printers support, and to Chapter 3,

“Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets,” for font

support information.

2-62 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Font Header

Format 16 Bitmap

Font Support

Font Header Format 16 was introduced with the HP

LaserJ et 4PJ for downloading large TrueType fonts. For the

HP LaserJ et 4V, Font Header Format 16 has been extended

to support large bitmap fonts as well. The Font Header

command ( ? ) s # W [font header data] ) is used to

download font header data to the printer.

A large font is a bound font with character codes that are

not limited to 8-bit values. For this reason a large font is

sometimes called a 16-bit font.

Font Header Format

Font Header Format 16 was introduced because some font

data segments in large fonts could be larger than 65535

bytes, and this was not supported by Font Header Form

at 15. The structures of Format 15 and Format 16 are

identical with the exception of the Segment Size field in the

Segmented Font Data format. Table 2-10 below shows the

Format 15 and Format 16 Font Header format. Table 2-11

shows the Format 15 Segmented Font Data format. Table

2-12 shows the Format 16 Segmented Font Data format.

Note that Format 15 does not support bitmap fonts.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-63

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-10. Format 15 and Format 16 Font Header

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Font Descriptor Size (minimum 72)

Header Format (15 or 16)

Style MSB

Font Type

Reserved

Baseline Position

Cell Width

Cell Height

Orientation

Spacing

Symbol Set

Pitch (default HMI)

Height

x-Height

Width Type

Style LSB

Stroke Weight

Typeface MSB

Quality

Typeface LSB

Serif Style

Placement

Underline Position (Distance)

Text Height

Underline Thickness

Text Width

First Code

Last Code/Number of Characters

Pitch Extended

Cap Height

Height Extended

44 - 47 Font Number

48 - 63 Font Name

Scale Factor

Master Underline Position

Master Underline Thickness

Font Scaling Technology

Variety

[additional data may be inserted here]

. . .

Desc. Segmented Font Data

Size

. . .

# - 2

Reserved (0)

Checksum

2-64 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-11. Format 15 Segmented Font Data

Byte

x + 0

x + 2

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

First segment, Segment Identifier

First segment, Segment Size

x + 4

. . .

First segment, Data Segment

. . .

x + 4

+ 1st

Second segment: Segment identifier,

Size, Data Segment

seg size . . .

. . .

# - 6

# - 4

# - 2

Null Segment Identifier (FFFF - hex)

Null Segment Size (0)

Reserved (0)

Checksum

x = Font Descriptor Size

# = Font header length (as defined in the Font Header command).

Table 2-12. Format 16 Segmented Font Data

Byte

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

x + 0

First segment, Segment Identifier

First segment, Segment Size

x + 2

x + 4

x + 6

. . .

First segment, Data Segment

. . .

x + 6

+ 1st

Second segment: Segment identifier, Size, Data Segment

. . .

seg size

. . .

# - 8

Null Segment Identifier (FFFF - hex)

Null Segment Size (0)

# - 6

# - 4

# - 2

Reserved (0)

Checksum

x = Font Descriptor Size

# = Font header length (as defined in Font Header command).

Printer-Specific Differences 2-65

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Segment Size field, which is part of each segment

within the Segmented Font Data, was changed from an

unsigned integer in Format 15 to an unsigned long integer

in Format 16. This allows segments to be up to 2³²– 1 bytes

long.

Font Header Format 15 is described in more detail in the

PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual in the

“Soft Font Creation” chapter.

Format 16 supports new segments and new values for the

Font Type and Font Scaling Technology fields. New

segments which are specific to large TrueType fonts are

described in this chapter in the section titled “HP LaserJ et

4PJ printer.” (This information will included be in future

versions of the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference

Manual.) The new segments and values which are specific

to bitmap fonts are described below.

Header Format

The Header Format byte identifies the font header format.

For large fonts, this field should be set to 16. Note that

Format 15 does not support bitmap fonts.

Scale Factor

For bitmap fonts, set this field to 0.

Master Underline Position

For bitmap fonts, set this field to 0.

Master Underline Thickness

For bitmap fonts, set this field to 0.

Font Scaling Technology

For bitmap fonts, set this field to 254.

Variety

For bitmap fonts, set this field to 0.

2-66 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The remaining fields should be set the same as in the

Format 0 Font Header for PCL Bitmapped Fonts, with the

following exceptions:

Font Type

Font type describes the font’s relation to symbol sets. For

Format 16 bitmap fonts, set this field to 3. A value of 3 is

used to identify a large (16-bit) font. All character codes 0 to

65534 are printable, except 0, 7 to 15, and 27 [decimal].

Access to those codes which are unprintable, yet have a

character defined, requires the use of the Transparent Print

Data command. In older font header formats, PCL 5

LaserJ et printers use this field to determine the first and

last codes of the symbol set.

First Code

For Format 16 bitmap fonts, set this field to the first

printable character in the font. In older bitmap font

formats, PCL 5 LaserJ et printers ignore this field.

Last Code

For Format 16 bitmap fonts, set this field to the last

printable character in the font. In older bitmap font

formats, PCL 5 LaserJ et printers ignore this field.

One new data segment is defined for Format 16 bitmap

fonts:

Bitmap Resolution Data Segment

The bitmap resolution data segment is used to define the

x-resolution and y-resolution for the bitmap. This segment

is required for Format 16 bitmap fonts.

The structure for the bitmap segment is shown in

Table 2-13.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-67

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-13. Bitmap Resolution Data Segment

Byte

x + 0

15 (MSB)

(LSB) 0

Segment Identifier (’BR’)

Segment Size (4)

x + 2

x + 4

x + 6

x + 8

X Resolution

Y Resolution

The decimal equivalent for the ’BR’ mneumonic is 16978.

X Resolution (unsigned long integer)

This fields specifies the resolution of the font in the X

dimension in dots per inch.

Y Resolution (unsigned long integer)

This fields specifies the resolution of the font in the Y

dimension in dots per inch.

If the specified combination is not supported by the printer,

the font will be invalidated. In the HP LaserJ et 4V,

supported combinations are (X Resolution=300,Y

Resolution=300) and (X Resolution=600,Y Resolution=600).

Character Definition

The Character Descriptor and Data command

( ?( s # W [character descriptor and data] ) is used to

download character data blocks to the printer. Format 4 is

used to download character descriptors and data for bitmap

characters. This command is described in detail in the PCL

5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual.

2-68 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Limitations

The following limitations apply to Format 16 Font Headers

for bitmap fonts:

The Font Type field for Format 16 bitmap fonts must be

set to 3. This is the case for 1-byte as well as 2-byte

bitmap fonts. First Code and Last Code fields need to be

set.

Format 16 optional data segments are ignored for bitmap

fonts. These include the galley character segment,

vertical substitution character segment, typeface string

segment, and vertical rotation segment.

Vertical rotated printing (character text path direction

command, ?&c-1T) is not available for bitmap fonts.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-69

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP Color LaserJet

Printer

As its name implies, the HP Color LaserJ et printer is a

color laser printer. This 300 dpi printer adds several new

features to the PCL 5 language. These new features are

summarized in the table below and are described in detail

in the PCL 5 Color Technical Reference Manual (part

number 5961-0940). The printer also supports logical

operations, the HP-GL/2 Merge Control command, and

pixel placement (both PCL and HP-GL/2 commands). These

commands are described in the HP LaserJ et 4L section of

this chapter and also in the PCL 5 Color Technical

Reference Manual.

Table 2-14. PCL Feature Additions for HP Color LaserJet Printer

Feature

Status

Comments

AppleTalk Configuration

Modified

In addition to supporting the RENAME, J OB, and TYPE

key values, this printer also supports the ZONE value.

Assign Color Index

New

Assigns the three current color components to the specified

palette index number.

Color Components 1, 2, 3

Color lookup Tables

These three commands specify the three color components of

any new color entry in the color palette.

Enables and specifies color lookup tables to map color input

data into a new output range based on point-by-point

conversions. A lookup table is specified for each primary

color.

CR (Color Range—HP-GL/2)

Configure Image Data

New

Sets the range for specifying relative color data.

Configures the printer for color imaging—establishes a

modifiable color palette, sets the pixel encoding mode, and

sets the number of bits per index and per primary color.

Download Dither Matrix

Download Pattern

New

Specifies a single dither matrix for all three primary colors.

Downloads user-defined patterns, including color patterns,

to the printer.

Foreground Color

New

Sets the foreground color to the specified index of the

current palette.

Gamma Correction

Monochrome Print Mode

Specifies the gamma correction to be applied equally to each

primary color.

Provides a means to convert a color page to a quick-printing

gray-scale equivalent.

NP (Number of Pens—HP-GL/2)

Palette Control

New

Resizes the palette after the IN or ?*v#W commands.

Provides a mechanism for marking and deleting palettes.

Palette Control ID

Identifies a palette to be used for some of the palette control

functions.

2-70 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-14. PCL Feature Additions for HP Color LaserJet Printer (continued)

Feature

Status

Comments

PC (Pen Color—HP-GL/2)

New

Changes the pen color in a palette created by the IN or CID

command (?*v#W).

Push/Pop Palette

Raster Scaling

New

Pushes or pops the palette from the palette stack.

New/Modified

Several commands are added for raster scaling: Destination

Raster Width (?*t#H), Destination Raster Height (?*t#V);

also, two parameters are added to the Start Raster Graphics

command to initiate scaling (?*r2A and ?*r3A). (See the PCL

5 Color Technical Reference Manual for more information.)

Render Algorithm

New

Selects the algorithm to be used for rendering page marking

entities on a given page.

Select Palette by ID

New

Activates a palette with the specified ID number.

Set Viewing Illuminant

Specifies the relative white point used in the determination of

a viewing illuminant condition.

Simple Color

New

Specifies an unmodifiable fixed-size palette.

Transfer Raster Graphics (by

plane)

Provides a means to send raster data by color plane. This

command sends a plane of raster data to the printer and

advances to the next plane.

AppleTalk

Configuration

Command

As discussed in the HP LaserJ et 4 section of this chapter,

the AppleTalk Configuration command allows a user to

send PCL jobs to the printer over AppleTalk. In addition to

the key values previously discussed (RENAME, TYPE, and

J OB), the HP Color LaserJ et printer also supports the

ZONE key value as follows.

ZONE

ZONE changes the zone field of the printer ’s AppleTalk

Network Identifier (Name Binding Protocol type field).

?&b#WZONE<sp >zon en a m e

Valid characters for the zone name include 0-255 except for

characters $00, “@” ($40), “:” ($3A), “*” ($2A), “=” ($3D),

$C5, and ($FF). The zone name must contain at least one

character, and only the first 31 characters are used. If the

zone is invalid, then the printer ’s zone is not changed. Zone

changes only occur after the present job has completed.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-71

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 4LJ

Pro Printer

The HP LaserJ et 4LJ Pro printer (C3935), released in May

1995, is designed primarily for the J apanese market. This

printer provides a print resolution of 600 dpi, has a

maximum print speed of 4ppm, 2Mb of internal base

memory, and improved font cache algorithm. PCL operation

for this printer is identical to that of the HP LaserJ et 4PJ

printer. For command support, refer to Table 1-1, PCL

Feature Support Matrix and to the “HP LaserJ et 4PJ

Printer” section earlier in this chapter.

The HP LaserJ et 4LJ Pro printer contains the same two

J apanese typefaces, MS Mincho and MS Gothic (and

WIN3.1J symbol set), as those in the HP LaserJ et 4PJ

printer. (The HP LaserJ et 4PJ and the 4LJ Pro printers

have a reduced set of Intellifont fonts from that of the

standard HP LaserJ et 4 printer family.) For detailed font

information refer to Chapter 3.

HP LaserJet 4LC

Printer

The HP LaserJ et 4LC printer (C3932), released in March

1995, is designed primarily for the Chinese market. This

printer provides a print resolution of 600 dpi, has a

maximum print speed of 4 ppm, 2Mb of internal base

memory, and improved font cache algorithm. PCL operation

for this printer is identical to that of the LaserJ et 4PJ

printer. For specific PCL command support information,

refer to Table 1-1, PCL Feature Support Matrix.

The HP LaserJ et 4LC printer contains three new Chinese

typefaces, SimSun, SimHei, and GW-Kai (and a new symbol

set for these fonts, GB2312). The default typeface is

SimSun and the default symbol set is GB2312. (The

HP LaserJ et 4LC printer contains the standard set of

Intellifont fonts, unlike the HP LaserJ et 4PJ and 4LJ Pro

printers which have reduced Intellifont typeface sets.)

Refer to Chapter 3 for detailed font information.

The typeface/font information, described in the “HP

LaserJ et 4PJ Printer” section earlier in this chapter for the

2-72 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

J apanese typefaces, also applies to the LaserJ et 4LC

printer ’s Chinese typefaces with the following differences.

The default values for the Text Parsing Method command

are different for the HP LaserJ et 4LC. These default values

are 0 or 38 (provided the default symbol set is GB2312,

otherwise it is 0). Also, the examples in this section can be

used for the Chinese fonts, provided the symbol set value

field in the Symbol Set command is changed to 18C (for the

GB2312 symbol set) and the typeface value in the font

selection command string is changed to one of the Chinese

fonts [for example, the J apanese font selection command

?(19K?(s1p10v1s4b2852T should be changed to

?(18C?(s1p10v1s4b37058T ].

HP LaserJet 5P

and 5MP Printers

The HP LaserJ et 5P and 5MP printers were released March

6, 1995. These printers are similar to the HP LaserJ et 4P

printer except that they are designed to run faster, have an

MP paper tray in place of the manual feed slot, and have a

reduced control panel similar to the HP LaserJ et 4L

printer. The HP LaserJ et 5P / 5MP printer ’s maximum

print speed is 6 pages per minute (HP LaserJ et 4P runs at

4 ppm) and has a print resolution of 600 dpi.

Another new feature on this printer is an IrDA-compliant

infrared serial I/O port located on the front of the printer.

PCL operation is almost identical to that of the HP

LaserJ et 4 Plus printer. (Refer to Table 1-1, HP LaserJ et

Printer Feature Comparison, for the specific PCL

implementation.)

Printer-Specific Differences 2-73

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 5L

Printer

The HP LaserJ et 5L printer, introduced in September 1995,

is much different in appearance than the LaserJ et 4L

printer, but it has a very similar feature set, including the

same set of 26 internal typefaces. One of the main

differences is that the LaserJ et 5L printer offers 600 dpi

printing. Although both printers have a print engine speed

of 4 pages per minute, the LaserJ et 5L printer has faster

processing which increases performance. As the LaserJ et

4L printer, the printer has a reduced-function control panel.

The HP LaserJ et 5L printer has a vertical design and

supports all paper sizes supported by the LaserJ et 4L

printer. In addition, the “custom” paper size is supported

through the printer driver.

The default symbol set is PC-8 instead of Roman-8.

Manual feed operation is slightly different for the HP

LaserJ et 5L printer. When manual feed is selected, the

printer pauses and waits for the user to insert the correct

media into the printer (either in the paper input bin or the

single sheet input slot) and press the control panel key.

PCL and PJ L operation is almost identical to that of the HP

LaserJ et 4L printer. Two differences are that the LaserJ et

5L printer adds support for the logical operations and pixel

placement commands. These features are described in this

chapter in the LaserJ et 4ML section. (Refer to Table 1-1,

HP LaserJ et Printer Feature Comparison, for the specific

PCL implementation.)

2-74 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 5Si

and 5SiMx Printers

HP LaserJ et 5Si and 5SiMx printers are designed for using

in shared printing environments. The HP LaserJ et 5SiMx

printer is equivalent to the HP LaserJ et 5Si printer, but

also includes PostScript Level 2, 8 Mb of additional

memory, and the HP J etDirect network interface card.

HP LaserJ et 5Si and 5SiMx printers have features similar

to those of HP LaserJ et 4Si and 4SiMx printers, with

improved performance and extra paper handling features.

Some of the feature differences are listed below.

The printers include the same set of internal fonts, but

there are no font cartridge slots on the printers. Both

printers support font/macro SIMMs and downloaded soft

fonts and macros.

The default symbol set is PC-8 instead of Roman-8.

Additional paper and envelope sizes are supported,

including ledger (11" x 17"). Executive size paper is only

supported by the MP tray.

There is no job offset mechanism in the printers.

HP LaserJ et 5Si and 5SiMx printers do not request

the envelope size every time the power is cycled. It is

assumed that the size does not usually change between

power down and power up.

Base HP LaserJ et 5Si and 5SiMx printers have one

100-sheet multi-purpose tray (Tray 1), and two 500-sheet

universal-input trays. Optional paper handling devices

include a duplex unit, a power envelope feeder, a

2000-sheet input tray and a multi-bin mailbox.

HP LaserJ et 4Si and 4SiMx printers used “tray locking”

to prevent automatic selection of a paper tray. HP

LaserJ et 5Si and 5SiMx printers accomplish “tray

locking” using the Alphanumeric ID command to select

the paper tray by media type.

Table 2-15 lists the PCL feature additions for HP LaserJ et

5Si and 5SiMx printers.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-75

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 2-15. PCL Feature Additions for HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx Printers

Feature

Status

Comments

Paper (Media) Source

Modified

Additional parameters have been added to provide support

for Tray 1, the printer ’s right side multi-purpose tray and

the other optional trays (see the description of this

command in the following paragraphs).

Output Bin

Modified

New

The Output Bin command (?&l#G) selects the destination

bin for the print job.

Alphanumeric ID

Specifies alphanumeric String IDs for selecting and

manipulating fonts, macros, and media types. Specifies

media selection by the type of media and supports

enhancements for the printer disk drive.

Descriptions of the Paper (Media) Source, Output Bin, and

Alphanumeric ID commands are provided below.

Paper (Media) Source

Command

The Paper (Media) Source command selects the specified

input media source. Parameters have been added to enable

printing from the LaserJ et 5Si/5SiMx printer trays.

?& l # H

# = 0 - Print current page (source is unchanged)

1 - Tray 2 (upper drawer)

2 - Manual feed (tray 1, right side tray)

3 - Manual envelope feed (tray 1, right tray)

4 - Tray 3 (lower drawer)

5 - High Capacity Input (HCI), first tray

6 - Optional envelope feeder

7 - Autoselect

8 - Tray 1 (right side tray)

20 - 39 - High Capacity Input (HCI) trays 2- 21

Defa u lt = 7

Ra n ge = 0 to 8, 20 - 39

2-76 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The following table compares the paper/media source

values and the trays they select on various printers.

Value (#) LaserJet 4, LaserJet

4 Plus, 4V 4Si/4SiMx

LaserJet 5Si/

5SiMx

PC Tray

Upper

Tray 2

Cassette

(upper drawer)

2, 3

MP Tray

Manual

Tray 1

(manual

feed)

Feed Slot

(right side,

manual feed)

MP Tray

Lower

Cassette

Tray 3

(lower drawer)

Cassette

LC Tray

N/A

First Tray of HCI

N/A

Tray 1

(right side,

normal)

Printer-Specific Differences 2-77

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Output Bin Command

This command selects the destination bin into which the

print job is output when printed.

?& l # G

# = 0 - Automatic selection

1 - Selects bin #1 (printer top/face-down bin)

2 - Selects bin #2 (printer left/face-up bin; this

bin not available when the High Capacity

Output (HCO) is attached)

3 - Selects bin #3 (HCO face up bin)

4 - Selects bin #4 (HCO #1 face down bin)

5 - Selects bin #5 (HCO #2 face down bin)

6 - Selects bin #6 (HCO #3 face down bin)

7 - Selects bin #7 (HCO #4 face down bin)

8 - Selects bin #8 (HCO #5 face down bin)

9 - Selects bin #9 (HCO #6 face down bin)

10 - Selects bin #10 (HCO #7 face down bin)

11 - Selects bin #11 (HCO #8 face down bin)

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = 0 to 11

Note

The Output Bin command is not recommended. Instead, it

is preferred that the PJ L OUTBIN command be used to set

the default media destination.

2-78 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Alphanumeric ID

Command

The Alphanumeric ID command performs several different

functions depending on the operation specified. This

command:

Specifies the type of print media on which to print a job

(rather than specifying its location)

Specifies an ID string for different PCL objects (fonts and

macros)

Supports the mass storage PCL enhancements for the

LaserJ et 5Si/5SiMx printer disk (allowing, for example,

downloading a font with a String ID to RAM— download-

ing to the printer disk must be done using PJ L)

The format of the Alphanumeric ID command is as follows:

?& n # W[Operation][String ID]

# = Number of bytes of String ID data

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = 2 to 512

The value field (#) identifies the number of bytes in the

String ID.

The Operation byte determines the type of operation and

the type of object on which the operation is to be performed.

The operations are listed in the table below.

The String ID begins with the second byte and can be up to

511 characters long.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-79

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Description

Set s th e cu r r en t F on t ID to th e given Str in g ID. This operation allows

the user to set the current PCL Font ID to a string name, which gives the

user the ability to download fonts to a string name. If the current Font ID

has been set with both the Alphanumeric ID command and the Font ID

command (?*c#D), the ID last sent takes precedence. For example, if the

current font ID was set to 10 and then to “Font1”, the current font ID would

be “Font1”.

Associa tes th e cu r r en t F on t ID to th e fon t w ith th e Str in g ID

su p p lied . This operation finds the font with the supplied String ID and

assigns the current Font ID to that font so that the font now has two names.

The original font name is used to perform font management commands on

the font, and the new associated name is used when selecting the font for

usage. Note that since fonts with string names can be associated to numeric

Font IDs, these fonts are selectable in HP-GL/2 using the numeric Font ID.

Select s th e fon t r efer r ed to by th e Str in g ID a s p r im a r y. This operation

finds the associated font using the supplied String ID and specifies that font

as the current primary font. The command is ignored if there is no font with

that String ID.

Select s th e fon t r efer r ed to by th e Str in g ID a s secon d a r y. This

operation functions the same as the primary font specification (operation

number 2), however this command specifies the font as secondary.

Set s th e cu r r en t Ma cr o ID to th e Str in g ID. This operation allows the

user to set the current PCL Macro ID to a String ID name. If the current

Macro ID has been set with both the Alphanumeric ID command and the

Macro ID command (?&f#Y), the ID last sent takes precedence. For example,

if the current Macro ID was set to 10 and then to “Macro1”, the current

macro ID would be “Macro1”.

Associa tes th e cu r r en t Ma cr o ID to th e su p p lied Str in g ID. This

operation finds the macro with the supplied String ID and assigns the

current Macro ID to that macro. This macro then has two names. The

original Macro ID name is used to perform macro management commands on

the macro, and the new associated name is used when executing, calling, or

overlaying the macro.

Deletes th e fon t a ssocia tion n a m ed by th e cu r r en t F on t ID. The font

must have been associated with an alphanumeric Font ID (using operation 0).

No String ID is supplied (?&n1W20). This command removes the alphanumeric

font name association, however the disk resource itself is not changed.

2-80 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation

Description

Deletes th e m a cr o a ssocia tion n a m ed by th e cu r r en t Ma cr o ID. The

macro must have been associated with an alphanumeric Macro ID (using

operation 4). No String ID is supplied (?&n1W21). This command removes

the alphanumeric macro name association, however the disk resource itself is

not changed.

100

Med ia select (see m ed ia selection ta ble). Media types are specified using

the printer control panel. The following table indicates which media type and

paper size is used in the various media-select situations.

Note

PCL objects stored on the printer disk cannot be deleted,

set to temporary, set to permanent, or modified in any way

using the PCL language.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-81

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Media Type

Paper Size

Paper Source

Size/Type Used

Default size

Not specified

Default type

Not specified

Specified

Not specified

Specified

(not manual feed)

Default size

Type configured in specified tray

Specified

(manual feed)

Manual feed request

Default size

Not specified

Specified size

Default type

Specified

(not manual feed)

Specified size

Type configured in specified tray

Specified

(manual feed)

Manual feed request

Specified size

Not specified

Default size

Specified type

Specified

(not manual feed)

Default size

Specified type

Specified

(manual feed)

Manual feed request

Default size

Specified type

Specified

Not specified

Specified size

Specified type

Specified

(not manual feed)

Specified size

Specified type

Specified

(manual feed)

Manual feed request

Specified size

Specified type

A paper source is considered to be not specified when a

Media Source command has not been received or when the

media source is set to autoselect (value 7). The media type

is considered to be not specified when an Alphanumeric ID

command for media type (value 100) has not been received.

Selecting the default media type causes the printer to

consider the media type as not specified.

Selecting an undefined or unavailable ID causes the printer

to generate a manual feed request.

2-82 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Using the Alphanumeric ID Command to

Download a Font

Fonts can be downloaded to the printer disk using PJ L, or

using PCL you can download a font with a String ID to

RAM. The following example demonstrates downloading a

font to a string name using PCL.

Set the alphanumeric font ID to “TTFont1”

?&n8W0TTFont1

Download the font. It is assigned the String ID “TTFont1”

?sW[data]

Example: Using a Font with a String ID

When the user wants to use a font with a String ID, the

user must first associate that font with a new Font ID

number. This association is required so that whether the

font is on disk or RAM, the procedure is the same.

Set the current Font ID to “AssociatedFontID”

?&n17W0AssociatedFontID

Find the font with ID “UnivRomanID” on disk or in RAM

and give it the associated ID of “AssociatedFontID”

?&n12W1UnivRomanID

Set the current Font ID to 10

?*c10D

Find the font with String ID “TimesRmID” on disk or in

RAM and give it the associated Font ID of 10

?&n10W1TimesRmID

Set the current secondary font to the font with a Font ID of

10 (which in this case, is an associated font)

?)10X

Printer-Specific Differences 2-83

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Specify the current font as primary using the alphanumeric

ID command

?&n17W2AssociatedFontID

Delete the name “AssociatedFontID” from the PCL database

?&n17W0AssociatedFontID

?&n1W20

Reset the printer. Resetting deletes all font and macro

associations.

2-84 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP DeskJet 1200C

Printer

The DeskJ et 1200C is a 300-dpi LaserJ et-compatible

thermal inkjet color printer. It uses PCL 5 and is very

compatible with the LaserJ et 4 family of printers. The main

differences between the DeskJ et 1200C and the LaserJ et 4

printer are summarized in the table below (for a complete

listing, see Table 1-1).

Table 2-16. PCL Feature Additions for HP DeskJet 1200C Printer

Feature

Status

Comments

Enter HP-GL/2 Mode

Modified

Three additional parameters (-1, 2, 3) have been added to

provide support for Standalone HP-GL/2 Mode (?%-1B), for

using the current PCL coordinate system/previous HP-GL/2

pen position (?%2B), and for using the current PCL

coordinate system/current PCL CAP (?%3B).

Media Type

New

Sets the print mode required for printing on various media

types.

Mechanical Print Quality

Negative Motion

New

Determines the graphics print quality.

Specifies whether negative motion will be used.

Raster Scaling

New/Modified

Several commands are added for raster scaling: Destination

Raster Width (?*t#H), Destination Raster Height (?*t#V),

Scale Algorithm (?*t#K); also, two parameters are added to

the Start Raster Graphics command to initiate scaling

(?*r2A and ?*r3A). (See the PCL 5 Color Technical

Reference Manual for more information.)

Color Commands

New

See Table 1-1 for a complete list of color commands

supported by the printer. See the PCL 5 Color Technical

Reference Manual for descriptions of the color commands.

The DeskJ et 1200C printer does not support the following

LaserJ et 4 features:

Unit of Measure (?&u#D)

Status Readback (?*s#X, ?*s#U, ?*s#M, ?*s#T, ?*s#I)

Raster resolutions of 200 dpi and 600 dpi

Page sizes: Executive, A4, J IS B5 paper, International B5

envelope, Monarch envelope

HP-GL/2 in macros

Printer-Specific Differences 2-85

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Updated Features

Printers with a “B” or “C” revision code, indicated by the

third digit in the serial number, have the following

additional new features. (Print the self-test to see the serial

number.)

Tw o-Byte F on ts. Provides support for two-byte (large)

fonts with more than 256 characters. Two-byte fonts

support such large symbol set mappings as Unicode,

Shift-J IS, J IS208, and Big5. Two-byte fonts are

compatible with current PCL data structures.

F r a m e Bu ffer /MEt Ar ch itectu r e. Provides MEt

(Memory Enhancement technology), which overcomes

memory contention problems. Drivers can use the PJ L

SET command (@PJ L SET PAGEPROTECT=LETTER/

LEGAL/ A4/OFF) to put the printer into a page protect

mode that reserves the memory equivalent of a complete

full-color frame buffer for the current page size. Page

protect mode reserves printer memory blocks large

enough to represent cyan, magenta, and yellow (CMY)

bitmaps for an entire page of the currently selected

media).

Noise Dith er. Two new halftone render algorithms

(noise dither and monochrome noise dither) have been

added.

Ar bitr a r y Dith er Ma tr ix Sizes. The printer now

allows the full 16-bit range for downloaded dither matrix

height and width (?*m#W).

2-86 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Enter HP-GL/2 Mode

Command

The Enter HP-GL/2 Mode command causes the printer

to interpret data as HP-GL/2 commands instead of PCL

commands. Three new parameters are added: one enables

stand-alone plotter mode (?%-1B), and the other two affect

the coordinate system and pen position when switching into

HP-GL/2 (?%2B and ?%3B).

?%# B

# = –1 - Stand-alone plotter mode (single context)

0 - Use previous HP-GL/2 pen position

1 - Use current PCL CAP

2 - Use current PCL dot coordinate system and

old HP-GL/2 pen position

3 - Use PCL dot coordinate system and the

current PCL CAP

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = –1 to 3

HP-GL/2 mode remains in effect until a Start Raster

command (?*r#A), Reset (?E), UEL command

(?%-12345X), or power-on.

In stand-alone plotter mode (?%–1B), only a single context

can be used (HP-GL/2 and PCL cannot be merged on the

same page).

A value field of 1 or 3 sets the HP-GL/2 pen position and the

label carriage return point to the current PCL CAP. A value

field of 2 or 3 transfers the current PCL dot coordinate

system, including the PCL origin and axes; the coordinate

system thus established is independent of the positions of

P1 and P2.

This command cannot be executed from display functions

mode or within a binary data transfer. HP-GL/2 ingnores

this command.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-87

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Media Type

Command

This command sets the print mode required for printing on

various media types.

?&l# M

# = 0 - Plain paper

1 - Bond paper

2 - Special paper

3 - Glossy film

4 - Transparency film

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = 0 to 4

If no printable data has been sent, this command moves

CAP to the top of form at the left margin of the current

page. If printable data has been sent, the page is closed and

printed, and CAP moves to the top of form at the left

margin of the next physical page.

When transparency media is loaded, the printer auto-

matically adjusts the media type to Transparency and the

print quality to Presentation Graphics, regardless of the

language or remote-panel selection.

The Media Type and Print Quality commands always

override remote control panel settings if the printer detects

a different type of media than was requested. It may

override these commands and the remote control panel

settings.

Note

This command may override the remote panel. HP

recommends programmatically setting media type,

especially in network environments.

2-88 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Quality

Command

This command determines print quality and speed.

?*o # Q

# = -1 - EconoFast

0 - Normal quality

1 - Best/Presentation graphics

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = -1, 0, 1

EconoFast prints black text at 300 dpi. When transparency

or glossy media is loaded, the printer automatically adjusts

the media type to Transparency and the print quality to

Presentation graphics, regardless of the language or

remote-panel selection.

The Media Type and Print Quality commands always

override remote control panel settings if the printer detects

a different type of media than was requested. It may

override these commands and the remote control panel

settings.

Note

This command must be sent at the beginning of the page

before any printable data; otherwise, when the command is

received, the current page is closed and printed.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-89

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Negative Motion

Command

The Negative Motion command specifies whether negative

motion will be used, thus determining whether the full page

must be buffered before printing can begin.

?& a # N

# = 0 - Picture contains negative motion (page

formatting printers)

1 - Picture contains no negative motion (swath

printers)

Defa u lt = 0

Ra n ge = 0, 1

If the page contains no negative motion, using the ?&a1N

command increases print speed.

Negative motion includes:

Vertical motion toward the top of the page

HP-GL/2 operations

Print directions other than 0 degrees

Landscape text

When the top of the character cell on the next line is

above the top of the character cell on the current line

The default value of 0 delays printing until all the

processing of input data for a page is complete. This is for

software that needs to compose the data before printing.

A value of 1 allows data to be printed as received, rather

than first stored in a buffer. Otherwise, printing will be

delayed until all processing of input data is complete.

Note

This command must be sent before any printable data is

received by the printer.

2-90 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP DeskJet 1600C

Printer

The DeskJ et 1600C printer is a follow-on to the DeskJ et

1200C. It has 600 x 600 dpi black text resolution (plus TES,

which is similar to RET) and 300-dpi color resolution. Like

the 1200C, the DeskJ et 1600C is font- and language-

compatible with the latest LaserJ et 4 series printers. The

DeskJ et 1200C and 1600C contain most of the same PCL 5

color features as the Color LaserJ et (described in the PCL 5

Color Technical Reference Manual), with some exceptions

and additions (see Table 1-1). DeskJ et 1200C and 1600C

drivers should work on the Color LaserJ et, but not vice

versa. Changes from the DeskJ et 1200C are listed below.

Table 2-17. PCL Feature Additions for the HP DeskJet 1600C Printer

Feature

Raster Resolution

Status

Modified

New

Comments

200 and 600 dpi are supported.

Enter HP-GL/2 Mode

Compression Method

Unit of Measure

HP-GL/2 standalone mode (-1) is not supported.

Method 9, replacement delta row is added.

Same as LaserJ et 4 series printers.

Paper Source

Modified

New

Autoselect (7) is added.

HP-GL/2 in PCL macros

Noise Dither*

HP-GL/2 commands may appear in PCL macros.

Modified

Noise ordered dither (13) and monochrome noise ordered

dither (14) are added.

Downloaded dither Matrix*

Two-Byte Fonts*

Modified

New

The full 16-bit range for height and width is allowed.

Font header format 16 two-byte font downloading.

Same as LaserJ et 4PJ printer.

Text Parsing Method*

New

* Also on "B" and "C" versions of the DeskJ et 1200C.

Additional features include:

Sim p lified Con tr ol P a n el. The IEEE-P1284 ECP port

described below allows front-panel simplification and the

elimination of DIP switches. The DeskJ et 1600C control

panel is similar to that of the LaserJ et 4L, with one

button and four LED indicators.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-91

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

IEEE-P 1284. This bi-directional enhanced capability

port (ECP) allows most printer features to be monitored

and controlled through Microsoft Windows or a DOS

remote control panel shipped with the product. In

previous HP printers, PJ L provided some job-level status

and control, but PJ L is embedded in the data stream,

synchronous with the printer description data. With the

implementation if MLC (Multiple Logical Channels) on

the ECP and MIO 6.0, the printer can be controlled and

monitored on a separate channel, asynchronous to the

data stream. PJ L still provides control that must be

synchronous with the data stream.

En er gy Sta r. The printer lowers its power consumption

if it has not been used for 15 minutes.

Ou t-of-In k Sen sin g. An LED on the control panel

lights when a pen runs out of ink.

MIO. Modular I/O interface with auto-sensing I/O

configuration.

J etDir ect. Optional network cards: Novell, TCP-IP,

LocalTalk, EtherTalk, and third party.

P ostScr ip t. A SIMM upgrade is available.

Op tion a l Med ia Sou r ce. An optional sheet feeder tray

is available.

Med ia Detection . Automatic detection of media size

and media type (transparency).

2-92 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

P J L. Unlike the DeskJ et 1200C, which implemented

only the PJ L kernel, the DeskJ et 1600C printer supports

all of the PJ L commands listed below. Full PJ L imple-

mentation is not needed because of the multiple-channel

capability of the IEEE-P1284 Extended Capabilities

Port. DeskJ et 1600C also supports page protection with

the @PJ L SET PAGEPROTECT command.

COMMENT

DEFAULT

ECHO

INQUIRE

J OB

RESET

SET

ENTER

EOJ

UEL

P r in t Mod es. The DeskJ et 1600C has the following

user-selectable print modes:

Econ oF a st. The primary goal is cost per copy. The

secondary goal is high speed.

P r esen ta tion Gr a p h ics. Best quality graphics.

Nor m a l. Equal emphasis on quality and throughput.

Best mode for most uses, minimizing the need to switch

to other modes.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-93

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Media Source

Command

The Paper (Media) Source command (?&l#H) for the

DeskJ et 1600C uses a value of 5 for its optional sheet

feeder and also supports a value of 7 (autoselect). A value of

7 selects the current printer default source. The user,

through the application, may select a particular tray for the

first page or pages (for example, a fancy cover page), then

choose autoselect to pull paper from a default tray (for

example, containing standard paper). This is different than

option 0, which continues printing from the currently

selected source. The "default" source may be user-selected,

or based upon the printer ’s own algorithm.

Compression Method

Command

The Compression Method command (?*b#M) for

the DeskJ et 1600C supports Method 9 compression

(compressed replacement delta row encoding) in addition

to compression methods 0, 1, 2, 3, and 5.

Method 9 (Replacement Delta Row Encoding)

Like Method 3, this method replaces only bytes in the

current row that differ from the preceding (seed) row.

Unlike Method 3, the replacement (delta) bytes may be

encoded.

The replacement byte string (delta compression string)

consists of a command byte, optional offset bytes, optional

replacement count bytes, and the replacement data.

Command

Byte

Optional Offset Bytes Optional Replacement Count Bytes

Data

Bytes

2-94 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The command byte itself has three parts:

Control Bit Offset Count Replacement Count

Con tr ol Bit. Determines whether the replacement data

is compressed, and also the bit boundaries of the

command byte’s other two fields.

Offset Cou n t. The left offset (number of bytes) the

replacement data is offset from the current byte position

in the seed row.

Rep la cem en t Cou n t. The number of consecutive bytes

to be replaced. One more byte than the replacement

count is replaced (for example, 6 bytes are replaced by a

replacement count of 5).

Like compression method 3, the “current” byte follows the

last replacement byte; at the beginning of a row, the current

byte immediately follows left raster margin. An offset of 0

indicates the current byte; an offset of 1 indicates the byte

following the current byte.

The size of the offset count and replacement count fields

depends on the value of the control bit.

CONTROL BIT = 0

Control Bit = 0

Offset Count

Replacement Count

If the control bit is 0, the replacement data is

uncompressed. If the control bit is 0, bits 0-2 indicate the

replacement count and bits 3-6 indicate the offset count.

If the offset count is 15, an additional offset count byte

follows and is added to the total offset count. If the offset

count byte is 255, another offset count byte follows. The last

offset count byte is indicated by a value less than 255.

If the replacement count is 7, an additional replacement

count byte follows and is added to the total replacement

Printer-Specific Differences 2-95

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

count. If the replacement count byte is 255, another

replacement count byte follows. The last replacement count

byte is indicated by a value less than 255. One more than

the total replacement byte count will be replaced.

CONTROL BIT = 1

Control Bit = 1

Offset Count

Replacement Count

If the control bit is 1, the replacement data is run length

encoded. the bit boundaries are different than if the control

bit is 0: bits 5-6 contain the offset count, and bits 0-4

contain the replacement count. As when the control bit is 0,

optional offset bytes and replacement bytes may be added.

2-96 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 5 and

5M Printers

HP LaserJ et 5 and 5M printers are performance-enhanced

follow-on products for HP LaserJ et 4 Plus and 4M Plus

printers, respectively. The enhanced PCL 5 printer

language in these printers include all of the PCL 5 features

supported by HP LaserJ et 4 Plus and 4M Plus printers as

well as the features listed in Table 2-18.

Table 2-18. PCL Feature Modifications for HP Color LaserJet 5 and 5M Printers

Feature

Status

Comments

Character Text Path Direction Command

Modified

A new algorithm decides whether or not to counter-

rotate characters when using the vertical rotated

printing mode.

Text Parsing Method Command

Label Mode (LM) Command

Modified

New

The default text parsing method is based on the font

type and symbol set fields in the default font.

HP-GL/2 support for 2-byte applications.

Text Parsing

When 2-byte text parsing methods were introduced in HP

LaserJ ets (from LaserJ et 4PJ on), the default text parsing

method was based on the default symbol set. For example,

if a user selected Roman-8 as the default symbol set

(via the control panel or a PJ L command), then 1-byte

text parsing was the default method. If they selected

WINJ -DBCS as the default symbol set, Shift-J IS text

parsing was the default method.

HP LaserJ et printers (from LaserJ et 5 and 5M on) now

base the default text parsing method on the font type and

symbol set fields in the default font. If the default font is a

16-bit font, the default text parsing method is set to one

that matches the symbol set field. In all other cases, the

default text parsing method is set to 1-byte text parsing.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-97

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Two-Byte HP-GL/2

Support

One-byte applications (which support non-orthogonal

rotation, scaling, and shearing of text) have long been able

to use HP-GL/2 to print to HP LaserJ et printers. Two-byte

applications have not had this capability until the

introduction of HP LaserJ et 5 and 5M printers.

The capability of 2-byte applications (which support

non-orthogonal rotation, scaling, and shearing of text) to

print to HP LaserJ et printers using HP-GL/2 is provided by

the Label Mode (LM) command.

Label Mode

Command

Determines how the Label (LB) and Symbol Mode (SM)

commands interpret characters. Used for printing a 2-byte

character set such as WinJ -DBCS, GB2312, or Big-5.

Syntax:

LM(mode,[row number]:)

Parameter

Format

Functional

Range

Default

mode

row number

clamped

integer

0, 1, 2, or

0 (8-bitmode)

clamped

integer

0 to 255

2-98 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Comments:

MODE. Determines the interpretation mode as follows:

Interprets each byte as a character (8-bit mode

where the default row_number equals "0").

Computed character code is equal to

(row_number * 256) + 8-bit code sent in LB or SM

command.

Interprets the next two bytes as a character (16-bit

mode). LB and SM commands will read two bytes

to form one 2-byte character code equal to

(first_byte * 256) + second_byte. Label terminator

and 8-bit control codes must be preceded by a

NULL byte. To turn symbol mode off while in 16-bit

mode, you must send SM<NULL>; where NULL is

ASCII or decimal 0.

Same logic as mode 0, except that vertical

substitutes are used if found in a VT segment of

the current font. Characters are rotated counter

clock-wise to match the vertical-rotated printing

mode of the Character Text Path Direction

command. Default row_number equals "0".

Same input logic as mode 1, except that vertical

substitutes are used if found in a VT segment of

the current font. Full width characters are rotated

counter clock-wise to match the vertical-rotated

printing mode of the Character Text Path Direction

command.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-99

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Row Nu m ber. Used only in modes 0 and 2 (8-bit

modes) when a 16-bit character set is selected. The row

number indicates the first byte while the LB or SM

instruction will supply the second byte.

For example, if you send LMO,37, and you have selected

a 16-bit character set, sending LBAB<TERM> would

result in the device printing characters 65 and 66 from

row 37 of the character set grid.

If you are using an 8-bit character set in 16-bit mode

(modes 1 or 3), you must specify the first byte of each

character as 0. All other first byte calues are treated as

undefined characters.

Notes:

When LM switches modes, it turns off symbol mode

(executes SM;).

LM affects the way SM and LB interpret bytes.

LM does not affect the DT or DL commands.

DT allows 8-bit terminator definitions only. To terminate

a label in 16-bit mode, precede the current label termina-

tor by the null character (decimal 0). The only exception

is the ?E (Reset) instruction in dual-context devices. ?E

is executed regardless of the byte boundaries within LB

and SM.

2-100 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Writing with

Proportional Fonts

The Character Text Path Direction command was

introduced with the HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer to allow users

to vertically rotate Asian fonts which were dual pitched.

That is, the single-byte characters were half-width and the

other characters were full-width.

An algorithm was implemented to determine whether or

not to counter-rotate characters when using the

vertical-rotated printing mode of the Character Text Path

Direction command. A character is rotated if the glyph is

full-width; otherwise, the character is not rotated.

Since the introduction of the LaserJ et 4PJ , many vendors

have produced proportional versions of their Asian fonts.

Thus, the algorithm described above is no longer

appropriate for determining character rotation.

A new method to explicitly enumerate which characters

should be counter-rotated in the font is being introduced

with HP LaserJ et 5 and 5M printers. The new method

consists of adding an optional font segment to Font Format

16. The optional segment, which is called the Vertical

Exception (VE) segment, has the following form:

UBYTE[2] SEGMENT ID

UBYTE Format

= ’VE’

= 0

(other values reserved)

UBYTE NumRanges

= N

UINT16 Range1FirstCode

UINT16 Range1LastCode

•

UINT16 RangeNFirstCode

UINT16 RangeNLastCode

Printer-Specific Differences 2-101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The new algorithm for deciding whether or not to

counter-rotate characters (when using the Character Text

Path Direction command’s vertical-rotated printing mode)

is as follows:

if (the current font contains a VE segment)

{

if(the character code* is NOT contained in

a VE range)

rotate

else

don’t rotate

}

else

use the old logic

* The original character code, even if a galley character

were substituted at some point.

Examples:

J apanese ShiftJ IS

J apanese Unicode

Segment ID

Format/NumRanges

Range1FirstCode

Range1LastCode

Range2FirstCode

Range2LastCode

0x0000

0x00FF

0x0000

0x007F

0xFF61

0xFF9F

half-width latin

characters

half-width

katakana

2-102 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP Color LaserJet

5 and 5M Printers

HP Color LaserJ et 5 and 5M printers use new HP Image

Resolution Enhancement technology 1200 (HP Image REt

1200) to project outstanding text, graphics, and more

vibrant colors than before.

The HP Color LaserJ et 5M printer is network-ready with

genuine Adobe PostScript Level 2 software, 36 Mbytes of

memory, and an HP J etDirect card. The HP Color LaserJ et

5 printer is upgradable so you can tailor it to suit the needs

of your particular environment.

HP Color LaserJ et 5 and 5M printers can use glossy paper

or transparency film for special output.

Modifications to the PCL language for HP Color LaserJ et 5

and 5M printers are summarized in the table below and are

described in detail in the PCL 5 Color Technical Reference

Manual (P/N 5961-0940):

Table 2-19. PCL Feature Modifications for HP Color LaserJet 5 and 5M Printers

Feature

Status

Modified

Support

Modified

Comments

Five new algorithms have been added.

Has unique functionality while in PCL Imaging mode.

Not supported.

Render Algorithm Command

Configure Image Data Command

Download Dither Matrix Command

Driver Configuration Command

Download Pattern Command

Do not support all features of the function_index argument.

Restricts the width and height of a user pattern to less than

16384 pixels.

Scale Algorithm Command

Font Cartridges

Support

Not supported.

Not supported. Customized fonts, if needed, can be utilized

via SIMMs.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Render Algorithm

Command

The Render Algorithm command selects the algorithm to be

used for rendering page marking entities on a given page.

?*t#J

# =

0-14 - See section 4, “Modifying Output Color”

in the PCL 5 Color Technical Reference

Manual for information on algorithms

0 through 14.

15 - Continuous tone smooth 150 lpi

16 - Monochrome continuous tone detail

300 lpi

17 - Monochrome continuous tone smooth

150 lpi

18 - Continuous tone basic 100 lpi

19 - Monochrome continuous tone basic

100 lpi

Defa u lt = 3

Ra n ge = 0 to 19 (invalid values are ignored;

values 1, 2, 9, and 10 are ignored for

device-independent color)

HP Color LaserJ et 5 and 5M printers remap non-continous

tone render algorithms (3 - 14) into continuous tone smooth

(15) and monochrome continuous tone smooth (17)

algorithms.

2-104 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 6P/

6MP Printers

The HP LaserJ et 6P and 6MP printers are similar to the

LaserJ et 5P and 5MP printers, with the addition of higher

performance and faster print speed (up to 8 ppm). The PCL

5 feature set is identical to the LaserJ et 5P/5MP printers,

with the exception that the LaserJ et 6P/6MP printers

support some additional paper sizes (A5, J IS B5, J IS B4,

and Oufuku-Hagaki postcards).

The HP LaserJ et 6MP printer also includes the Adobe

PostScript Level 2 printer language with 35 additional

built-in PostScript fonts.

HP LaserJet 5Si

Mopier

The HP LaserJ et 5Si Mopier combines the performance and

network strengths of the LaserJ et 5Si/5SiMx printers with

the ability to print, collate, and staple multiple copies of a

document. The LaserJ et 5Si Mopier has the same PCL

feature set as the LaserJ et 5Si/5Si printers, but allows you

to download a document just once and then print as many

originals as you need.

Multiple-original printing (“mopying”) and stapling is

accomplished using PJ L commands. The application soft-

ware, using PJ L commands, determines to which output

bin the printed copy will be delivered. If the stapling bin is

selected, the job is automatically stapled.

Note

Multiple mopies are produced using the PJ L SET QTY

command. In order for the mopier to produce more than one

original of a print job, the PCL number of copies command

(?&l#X) must not be included in the data stream, since this

command will limit the job to one copy or produce multiple

uncollated copies.

See the PJ L Printer J ob Language Technical Reference

Manual for a PJ L example of printing to the mopier.

Printer-Specific Differences 2-105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

HP LaserJet 6L

Printer

The HP LaserJ et 6L printer looks like the LaserJ et 5L

printer and has an identical PCL feature set. At 6 pages-

per-minute, it prints two more pages per minute than the

LaserJ et 5L, contains the same standard typefaces, and

supports the same paper sizes. Like the LaserJ et 5L, the

LaserJ et 6L printer does not have a control panel.

(Refer to Table 1-1, HP LaserJ et Printer Feature

Comparison, for the specific PCL implementation.)

HP LaserJet 4000

Series Printers

The HP LaserJ et 4000 series printers are similar to the

LaserJ et 5/5M printers in their design and PCL feature set.

They support a very similar set of paper sizes. (Refer to

Table 1-1, HP LaserJ et Printer Feature Comparison, for the

specific PCL implementation.)

Selecting Media Type

Besides using the Media Type command (?&l#M) to select

a print media, with the LaserJ et 4000 series printers you

can also use the Alphanumeric ID command as follows:

?&n11W[binary 100][name]

where name is a media type string such as “Preprinted”

For example:

?&n6W[binary 100]Legal

selects the “Legal” media type.

For more information on the Alphanumeric ID command,

see page 2-79.

2-106 Printer-Specific Differences

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol Sets

Introduction

This chapter identifies the internal typefaces/fonts and

their associated symbol sets available in the various

printers. This information is presented first for bitmap

fonts and their symbol sets, then for scalable typefaces and

their symbol sets.

Note

Internal refers to those typefaces/fonts and symbol sets

which are resident in the printer.

Fonts 3-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bitmap Fonts and

Symbol Sets

Table 3-1 identifies the resident bitmap fonts for the

printers. The supported symbol sets for these bitmap fonts

are shown in Table 3-2. The HP LaserJ et III, IIID, IIIP, and

IIISi printers contained all these bitmap fonts. However,

with the introduction of the HP LaserJ et 4 printer, the

bitmap Courier was replaced by a scalable Courier typeface

(refer to “Scalable Typefaces and Symbol Sets”). The HP

LaserJ et 4L, 5L, and 6L printers do not contain any bitmap

fonts. If this printer receives a request for Line Printer, the

fixed-pitch scalable Courier typeface is substituted. Except

as noted, the DeskJ et 1200C and 1600C support the same

fonts and symbol sets as the HP LaserJ et 4 printer.

Table 3-2 identifies the symbol sets available for the

internal bitmap fonts. Note that this list is for the bitmap

fonts only. For the scalable typeface symbol sets, refer to

the section “Scalable Typefaces and Symbol Sets.”

Table 3-1.

Bitmap Fonts (All Fixed Pitch)

4, 4M, 4P, 4MP, 4Si, 4ML, 4PJ, 4LJ Pro,

Typeface

Pitch/Point

Treatment

Orientation

III, IIID, IIIP, 4LC, 4Plus, 4M Plus, 4000 series, 4V,

IIISi

4MV, 5P, 5MP, 6P, 6MP, 5Si, 5SiMx,

5Si Mopier, 5, 5M, Color LJ, Color LJ

5, Color LJ 5M, DJ 1200C, DJ 1600C

✓

Courier

10/12 Med

10/12 Italic

10/12 Bold

12/10 Med

12/10 Italic

12/10 Bold

P & L

Courier

P & L

Courier

✓

Line Printer

16.67/8.5

Med

P & L

nr - not resident

P - Portrait

L - Landscape

3-2 Fonts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-2.

Bitmap Symbol Sets

Symbol Set¹

Roman-8

ISO 57 Chinese²

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 (ECMA-94)

PC-8

ISO 25 French²

ISO 2 IRV²

PC-8 Danish/Norwegian

PC-850

ISO 14 J IS ASCII²

ISO 61 Norwegian v2²

ISO 16 Portuguese²

ISO 84 Portuguese²

ISO 85 Spanish²

ISO 10 Swedish/Finnish²

HP German²

ISO 6 ASCII

Legal

ISO 21 German

ISO 17 Spanish

ISO 69 French

ISO 15 Italian

HP Spanish²

ISO 60 Norwegian v1

ISO 4 United Kingdom

ISO 11 Swedish: names

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2³

ISO 8859/9 Latin 5³

ISO 8859/10 Latin 6⁴

PCL 5 printers support an extensive range of additional symbol sets. Some of the more common sets and their associated IDs are listed in

Appendix C of this guide.

These symbol sets are becoming obsolete, are not recommended for future use, and are not resident on HP LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si, 4SiMx, 4L,

4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4000 series, HP LaserJet 5 family, LaserJet 6 family, HP Color LaserJet fam-

ily, and HP DeskJet 1200C and 1600C printers.

The ISO Latin 2 and 5 symbol sets are not supported on HP LaserJet III family and HP LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si, 4SiMx, 4L, HP DeskJet 1200C

and 1600C printers.

Resident on HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers only.

Scalable Typefaces

and Symbol Sets

Table 3-3 lists the internal scalable Intellifont typefaces

resident in the various printers. Table 3-4 lists the

TrueType typefaces. Most of these typefaces are unbound;

that is they can be linked to any of the available symbol

sets (with the limitations indicated). The symbol sets to

which a typeface can be bound are identified in Tables 3-5,

3-6, and 3-7. (A list of all of the assigned symbol set and

typeface codes is provided in Tables B-1, B-2, and B-3.)

Fonts 3-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-3.

Scalable Intellifont Typefaces

5P, 5Si, 5SiMx,

5Si Mopier,

6P, 6MP,

Typeface

Treatment

Typeface

Number

III,

IIID,

IIIP

IIISi

4PJ

4LJ

Pro

4LC

Color LJ,

Color LJ 5/5M,

DJ 1200C,

DJ 1600C,

LJ 4 family,

4000 series

✓

ITC Zapf Dingbats Med

4141

4101

4148

✓

CG Times

Univers

Med, It, Bld, Bld It

Univers Cond

Med Cnd, It Cnd,

Bld Cnd, Bld It Cnd

✓

Courier

Med, It, Bld, Bld It

Med, It, Bld

4099

4102

4362

Letter Gothic

Albertus

Med (semi-bold),

Extra Bld

✓

Antique Olive

Med, It, Bld

4168

4140

4116

4197

Clarendon Cond. Bld Cnd

✓

Coronet

Med It

Garamond

Antiqua (Med),

Kursiv (It),

Halbfett (Bd),

Kursiv Halb

✓

Marigold

Med

4297

4113

6826

CG Omega

Wingdings

Med, It, Bld, Bld It

Med

✓

- resident in the printer nr - not resident in the printer

3-4 Fonts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-4.

Scalable TrueType Typefaces

5P, 5Si, 5SiMx,

5Si Mopier,

6P, 6MP,

Typeface

Treatment

Typeface

Number

III,

IIID,

IIIP

IIISi

4PJ

4LJ

Pro

4LC

5M,

4000

series

Color LJ,

Color LJ 5/5M,

DJ 1200C,

DJ 1600C,

LJ 4 family

✓

Arial

Med, It, Bld, Bld It 16602 nr

Times New Roman Med, It, Bld, Bld It 16901 nr

Symbol

Med

16686 nr

31402 nr

Wingdings

CG Times

Univers

Med

Med, It, Bld, Bld It

4101

4148

Univers Cond

Med Cnd, It Cnd,

Bld Cnd, Bld It Cnd

✓

Courier

Med, It, Bld, Bld It

Med, It, Bld

4099

4102

4362

Letter Gothic

Albertus

Med (semi-bold),

Extra Bld

✓

Antique Olive

Med, It, Bld

4168

4140

4116

4197

Clarendon Cond. Bld Cnd

Coronet

Med It

Garamond

Antiqua (Med),

Kursiv (It),

Halbfett (Bd),

Kursiv Halb

✓

Marigold

CG Omega

Wingdings

MS Mincho

MS Gothic

SimSun

Med

4297

4113

6826

Med, It, Bld, Bld It

Med

✓

Med¹

28752 nr

28825 nr

37058 nr

37110 nr

37357 nr

✓

Sim Hei

GW-Kai

✓

- resident in the printer nr - not resident in the printer

Pseudo-bold, pseudo-italic, and pseudo-bold italic are available using character enhancements.

Fonts 3-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-5.

Scalable Symbol Sets

Printer

LaserJet 4 / 5 / 6 Families,

Color LaserJet Family,

DeskJet 1200C & 1600C

4PJ

4LJ Pro

4LC

Symbol Set¹

Roman-8

III, IIID, IIIP

IIISi

✓

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1

PC-8

PC-8 Danish/Norwegian

PC-850

ISO 6 ASCII

Legal

ISO 21 German

ISO 17 Spanish

ISO 69 French

ISO 15 Italian

ISO 60 Norwegian v1

ISO 4 United Kingdom

ISO 11 Swedish: names

ISO 57 Chinese²

ISO 25 French²

ISO 2 IRV²

ISO 14 J IS ASCII²

ISO 61 Norwegian v2²

ISO 16 Portuguese²

ISO 84 Portuguese²

ISO 85 Spanish²

ISO 10 Swedish/Finnish²

HP German²

HP Spanish²

✓

- symbol set is resident. nr - symbol set is not resident.

PCL 5 printers support an extensive range of additional symbol sets. Some of the more common sets and their associated IDs are shown in

Appendix C of this guide.

These symbol sets are soon to be obsolete, are not recommended for future use, and are not resident on any DeskJet 1200C or

DeskJet 1600C.

3-6 Fonts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-5.

Scalable Symbol Sets (continued)

HP LaserJet Printer

LaserJet 4/5 Families

5, 5M,

4000 series,

6P, 6MP

✓

Symbol Set¹

III, IIID, IIIP

IIISi

Color LaserJet Family,

DeskJet 1200C & 1600C

4LC

PC-1004 (OS/2)

DeskTop

✓

Ventura International ²

PS Text

✓

Ventura US

✓

Microsoft Publishing

Math-8

Ventura Math

✓

PS Math

Pi Font

Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats

PS ITC Zapf Dingbats

ITC Zapf Dingbats 100

ITC Zapf Dingbats 200

ITC Zapf Dingbats 300

ISO 8859-2 Latin 2

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5

ISO 8859-10 Latin 6

PC 852

PC 775

PC Turkish

MC Text

Windows 3.1 Latin 1

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

Windows Baltic (not 3.1)

Windows 3.0 Latin 1

Windows 3.1J (WIN3.1J )

GB2312

✓

Symbol

Wingdings

✓

- Indicates a symbol set is supported.

nr - Indicates a symbol set is not resident.

PCL 5 printers support an extensive range of additional symbol sets. Some of the more common sets and their associated IDs are shown in

Appendix C of this guide.

These symbol sets are soon to be obsolete and are not recommended for future use.

The Japanese Windows 3.1J symbol set is only resident in the LaserJet 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, and LaserJet 4V, 4MV, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier print-

ers if ESC/P SIMM installed.

The HP LaserJet 4L, 5L, and 6L printers do not support the Symbol symbol set.

Fonts 3-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-6. Intellifont Typeface Symbol Set Support

PCL Symbol

Set ID

Symbol Set

Times

Univers Courier Letter Albertus Antique Coronet Univers

Gothic

Olive

Cond.

Roman-8

•

◆

•

◆

•

◆

•

◆

ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA 94 Latin 1)

PC-8

10U

11U

12U

19U

PC-8 D/N

PC-850

Windows 3.1 Latin1 (ANSI)

DeskTop

10J

13J

14J

PS Text

Ventura International

Ventura US

Microsoft Publishing

Legal

ISO United Kingdom*

ASCII*

ISO Swedish: names*

ISO Italian*

ISO Spanish*

ISO German*

ISO Norwegian*

ISO French*

Windows 3.0 Latin 1

MC Text

12J

17U

PC-852

PC-Turkish

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

ISO 8859-2 Latin 2

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5

Math-8

15U

19M

579L

PS Math

Ventura Math

Pi Font

Symbol

Wingdings

•

Fonts supported by Color LaserJet family, DeskJet 1200C, LaserJet 4/5 families except 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, 4000 series, 5, and 5M. Courier is

the only Intellifont typeface family supported by the LaserJet 4PJ printer.

◆

Additional fonts supported by DeskJet 1200C,1600C (B,C revs.) & LaserJet 4/5/6 families except 4,4M,4Si,4SiMx,4PJ,4LJ Pro,4000 series,

5,5M.

3-8 Fonts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-6.

Intellifont Typeface Symbol Set Support (continued)

PCL Symbol

Set ID

Symbol Set

Clarend.

Cond.

Marigold

CG Omega

Garmnd.

Antiqua

Wingdings

Roman-8

•

◆

•

◆

•

◆

•

◆

ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (ECMA 94 Latin 1)

PC-8

10U

11U

12U

19U

PC-8 D/N

PC-850

Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (ANSI)

DeskTop

10J

13J

14J

PS Text

Ventura International

Ventura US

Microsoft Publishing

Legal

ISO United Kingdom *

ASCII*

ISO Swedish: names*

ISO Italian*

ISO Spanish*

ISO German*

ISO Norwegian*

ISO French*

Windows 3.0 Latin 1 (Windows)

MC Text

12J

17U

PC-852

PC-Turkish

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

ISO 8859-2 Latin 2

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5

Math-8

15U

19M

579L

PS Math

Ventura Math

Pi Font

Symbol

Wingdings

▲

•

▲

Supported by all LaserJet 4 / 5 / 6 family printers except 4PJ, 4L, 5L, 6L, 4LJ Pro, 4000 series, 5, and 5M.

Additional font supported by the HP LaserJet 4L, 5L, 6L, DeskJet 1200C (B and C revisions), and 1600C only.

◆

Additional fonts supported by LaserJet 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4LJ Pro, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V,4MV,4000 series, Color LJ, LaserJet 5/6 families except 5,

5M.

Fonts 3-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-7.

TrueType Typeface Symbol Set Support

Scalable TrueType Typefaces

Bitmap

Font

PCL

Symbol

Set ID

Symbol Set

Arial

Times

New

Roman

•

Wing-

dings

Symbol

Sim Sun

Line

Mincho, Sim Hei Printer

MS Gothic GW-Kai

Roman-8

•

◆

•

◆

•

◆

•

◆

•

ISO 8859-1 Latin 1 (was ECMA 94 Latin 1)

•

◆

•

◆

•

◆

•

◆

•

10U PC-8

11U PC-8 D/N

12U PC-850

19U Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (Microsoft “ANSI”)

PC-1004 (OS/2)

DeskTop

10J

13J

14J

PS Text

★

Ventura International

Ventura US

Microsoft Publishing

Legal

•

ISO United Kingdom *

ASCII*

ISO Swedish: names*

ISO Italian*

ISO Spanish*

ISO German*

ISO Norwegian*

ISO French*

12J

Windows 3.0 Latin 1 (formerly “Windows”)

MC Text

17U PC-852

26U PC-775

PC-Turkish

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

19L Windows Baltic (not 3.1)

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

ISO 8859-2 Latin 2

▲

•

Fonts supported by HP LaserJet 4, 4Si, 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4000 series, 5P, 5Si, 5SiMx,

5Si Mopier, 5, 5M, 6P, 6MP, Color LaserJet, Color LaserJet 5, and 5M printers.

◆

Additional fonts supported by HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers.

★

Not supported by HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers as well as Ventura synbol sets.

These subsets are variations of the Roman-8 set.

▲

Fonts supported by HP LaserJet 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4000 series, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier, 5, 5M, 6P, 6MP,

Color LaserJet, Color LaserJet 5, and 5M printers.

3-10 Fonts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-7.

TrueType Typeface Symbol Set Support (continued)

Scalable TrueType Typefaces

Bitmap

Font

PCL

Symbol

Set ID

Symbol Set

Arial

Times

New

Roman

•

◆

Wing-

dings

Symbol

Sim Sun

Line

Mincho, Sim Hei Printer

MS Gothic GW-Kai

ISO 8859-9 Latin 5

ISO 8859-10 Latin 6

•

▲

◆

Math-8

PS Math

Ventura Math

15U Pi Font

◆

19M Symbol

•

579L Wingdings

•

19K J apanese Windows 3.1J (WIN3.1J )

19C GB2312

★

•

Fonts supported by HP LaserJet 4, 4Si, 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4000 series, 5P, 5Si, 5SiMx,

5Si Mopier, 5, 5M, 6P, 6MP, Color LaserJet, Color LaserJet 5, and 5M printers.

▲

Fonts supported by HP LaserJet 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier, 6P, 6MP, Color LaserJet,

Color LaserJet 5, and 5M printers.

◆

Additional fonts supported by HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers.

★

Only for HP LaserJet 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, & 4V/4MV, 5Si/5SiMx and 5Si Mopier if ESC/P SIMM installed.

Fonts 3-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Typeface Selection

Differences

With the introduction of the HP LaserJ et IID printer,

Hewlett-Packard expanded the typeface value field (in the

font header) from a one-byte to a two-byte value field, thus

expanding the typeface range from 0-255 to 0-32767. This

expansion allows for additional typefaces.

Prior to the HP LaserJ et IID printer, typeface values used a

single byte (8-bits for a range of 0-255) for font selection.

This value, referred to as the typeface base value, was used

to identify fonts for selection. With the addition of the

second byte in the typeface value field, one bit was added to

the typeface base value range, increasing it from 8 bits to

9 bits (for a range of 0-511). This allows a greater range for

typeface base value selection.

In addition to expanding the typeface base value, two other

values were included in the two-byte typeface value:

ven d or n u m ber and ven d or ver sion . The vendor

number identifies the font vendor and the vendor version

identifies the version of the font. These two values are for a

vendor to create an updated version of the typeface. The

three values together represent the typ efa ce fa m ily

va lu e. Refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical

Reference Manual Chapter 11,“Font Creation - Typeface

Family,” for a more complete description of this two-byte

typeface family value.

Note

With the introduction of the HP LaserJ et 4 printer, HP

redefined the typeface field again, this time eliminating the

vendor version identifier and expanding the typeface family

to encompass the 12 least significant bits (bits 11-0) of this

16-bit field (see the field description for “Typeface” in

Chapter 11).

3-12 Fonts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Both the typeface family value and the typeface base value

can be used for font selection. Since the typeface family

value (two-byte value) is based on the typeface base value

(9 bit value), a font selection which specifies the typeface

base value may select a font described by a typeface family

value in the printer.

There is some variation in how font selection occurs

between PCL 5 printer models when mixing the typeface

family and base values. The typeface selection compatibility

for two types of values is identified for the various PCL 5

printers in Table 3-8.

Some typeface (two-byte) family values and their

corresponding base values are listed below. For a complete

listing of typeface family and base values, refer to Tables

C-2 and C-3 in Appendix C of this document.

Typeface Values

Family

Value

Typeface Family

Line Printer

Base

Value

218

16602

4168

4127

4119

4101

4148

Arial

Antique Olive

ITC Avant Garde

CG Century Schoolbook

CG Times

Univers

Fonts 3-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 3-8.

Base/Family Typeface Selection Compatibility

Typeface

Printer Font

Descriptor

Type

Selection

Command

?(s#T Type

PCL 5

Printer

IIP

IID

series II¹

Family

Value

Family

Value

Typeface

Selected

Typeface

Selected

Typeface

Selected

Ignores typeface

(value field too large)

Family

Value

Base

Value

Ignores

typeface

for font

selection

Ignores

typeface

for font

selection

Ignores

typeface

for font

selection

Ignores typeface for

font selection

(value field too large)

Base

Value

Family

Value

Typeface

Selected²

Ignores

typeface

for font

selection

Ignores

typeface

for font

selection

Typeface may be

selected

(font descriptor

typeface MSB field is

ignored)³

Base

Value

Base

Value

Typeface

Selected

Typeface

Selected

Typeface

Selected

Typeface Selected

This table assumes that the typeface type specified is available in the printer.

¹The LaserJet series II printer only accepts a typeface selection value field range of 0-255.

If two fonts are available in the printer that have the same value in the lower (LSB) byte of the font descriptor typeface field (such as 5 and

4101), the typeface selected will be one of these selected at random.

³The MSB typeface byte in the Font Descriptor is ignored by the printer; only the LSB typeface byte is read.

3-14 Fonts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Print Environment

Introduction

All of a printer ’s current feature settings are collectively

referred to as a print environment. A PCL printer

maintains four print environments: Factory Default

Environment, User Default Environment, Modified Print,

and Overlay Environment.

This chapter identifies the Factory Default Environment

and User Default Environment. The Factory Default

Environment, which is programmed into a printer at the

factory, is listed in Table 4-1 for the PCL context and

Table 4-2 for the HP-GL/2 context. The User Default

Environment, which can be set from a printer ’s control

panel, is listed in Table 4-3.

Note

If a feature setting is not supported on a printer (for exam-

ple, duplex on non-duplex printers, or status readback on

printers which do not support that feature), then the

printer ’s print environment does not contain that feature

setting. In the following tables, not all values are used for

all printers. See Table 1-1 to identify supported values for a

certain HP printer.

The HP LaserJ et 4PJ printer defaults to the ESC/P person-

ality. The defaults listed here are for PCL only.

Print Environment 4-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4-1.

Factory Default Environment — PCL Context

JOB CONTROL

Number of Copies¹

Duplex¹

Binding²

Off (Simplex)

Long-edge

Registration

Tray Lock¹

Manual Feed¹

J ob Separation³

Output Bin

Left=0, Top=0

All trays unlocked

Off

Upper (face down) bin

300 Units/inch

Units of Measure

PAGE CONTROL

Print Direction

Orientation¹

Page Size¹

Portrait

Letter

Paper (Media) Source

Paper Source (Printer Specific Large

Source)

Media Destination

Vertical Motion Index¹

Horizontal Motion Index⁴

Top Margin

0 (Automatic Selection)

8 (6 lpi)

12 (10 cpi)

1/2" (150 dots)

Text Length

60 lines

Left Margin

Left logical page boundary

Right logical page boundary

Right Margin

Perforation Skip

Line Termination

CR→CR, LF→LF, FF→FF

User can select default values from the printer’s Operator Control Panel for these feature settings.

Selectable from the printer Operator Control Panel if duplex is selected.

Used on HP LaserJet IIISi and 4Si printers only.

The font characteristics are determined by the default font. The default font can be the factory default font, the

user selected default font from the Operator Control Panel, or from a font cartridge with a default font.

4-2 Print Environment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4-1.

Factory Default Environment — PCL Context (continued)

FONTS ¹

Symbol Set^2,6

Spacing⁶

Pitch³

Roman-8

Fixed

10 cpi

12 point

Upright

Medium

Courier

Height⁴

Style

Stroke Weight

Typeface⁶

UNDERLINING

Underlining Mode

Off

CHARACTER TEXT PATH DIRECTION

Character Text Path Direction

0 (horizontal)

TEXT PARSING

Text Parsing Method⁵

0 or 31

FONT MANAGEMENT

Font ID

Character Code

Symbol Set ID

RASTER GRAPHICS

Presentation Mode

3 (Print image along the physical page

width)

Left Graphics Margin

Resolution

75 dpi

Compression Mode

Raster Height

N/A

Raster Width

Logical Page Width

The font characteristics are determined by the default font. The default font can be the factory default font, the user selected default font

from the Operator Control Panel, or from a font cartridge with a default font.

User can select default values from the printer’s Operator Control Panel for these feature settings.

Selectable from the front panel if a fixed-space scalable font was selected as the user default.

Selectable from the front panel if a proportional scalable font was selected as the user default.

If the default symbol set is WIN31J, the value is 31; otherwise, it is 0—only available on the LaserJet 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, and LaserJet 4V/4MV

printers if the ESC/P SIMM is installed. If the default symbol set is GB2312, the value is 38; otherwise it is 0.

For the LaserJet 4PJ and 4LJ Pro printers, the default symbol set is WIN31J, the default typeface is MS Mincho, and the default spacing is

proportional. For the LaserJet 4V/4MV printer, the default symbol set is Roman-8, default typeface is Courier, and spacing fixed;

Japanese customers must explicitly change the defaults if desired. For the LaserJet 4LC printer, the default symbol set is GB2312,

default typeface is Sim Sun, and the default spacing is proportional. For the LaserJet 5L, 5Si, 5SiMx, 6P, 6MP printers and the LaserJet 5Si

Mopier, the default symbol set is PC-8.

Print Environment 4-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4-1.

Factory Default Environment — PCL Context (continued)

PRINT MODEL

Current Pattern

Solid

Source Transparency Mode

Pattern Transparency Mode

Pattern Reference Point

Logical Operation

0 (transparent)

0, 0

ROP 252

Pattern Rotation

0 (Pattern rotates with print direction)

RECTANGULAR AREA FILL

Horizontal Rectangle Size

Vertical Rectangle Size

Area Fill ID

PICTURE FRAME

Picture Frame Width

Logical page width

Picture Frame Height

Picture Frame Anchor Point

Text length

PCL Cursor at left edge of the logical page

(top margin plus 75% of VMI)

HP-GL/2 Plot Horizontal Size

HP-GL/2 Plot Vertical Size

Picture frame horizontal size

Picture frame vertical size

MACRO

Macro ID

TROUBLESHOOTING

End-of-Line Wrap

Display Functions

Off

STATUS READBACK

0 - Invalid location

0 - All units

Current Location Type

Current Location Unit

4-4 Print Environment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4-2.

Factory Default Environment — HP-GL/2 Context

CHARACTER GROUP

Character Set

Roman-8

Font Spacing

Fixed

Pitch

10 cpi

Height

12 point

Posture

Upright

Stroke Weight

Medium

Typeface

HP-GL/2 stick

Character Direction

Character Direction Mode

Character Size

Horizontal

Absolute

Size transformation off

Character Size Mode

Character Slant

Extra Horizontal Space

Extra Vertical Space

Character Fill Mode

Label Origin

Absolute

Solidly filled, no edging

Label Terminator

Transparent Data Mode

Primary Font ID

Secondary Font ID

Scalable or Bitmap Font

Etx

Off

Select scalable fonts only

VECTOR GROUP

Absolute

Plotting Mode

Pen State

POLYGON GROUP

Polygon Buffer

Polygon Mode

Cleared

Off

Print Environment 4-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4-2.

Factory Default Environment — HP-GL/2 Context (continued)

LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTE GROUP

Line Type

Solid

Line Type Repeat Length

Line Cap

4% of the diagonal distance from P1 to P2

Butt

Line J oin

Mitered

Miter Limit

Pen Width

0.35mm

Pen Width Selection Mode

Selected Pen

Metric

No pen

Symbol Mode

Off

Fill Type

Solid (bi-directional)

Eight standard line types

(0,0) Plotter units

Solid fill

User-defined Line Type

Anchor Corner

User-defined Fill Types

Transparency Mode

Screened Vector

On (transparent)

No screening

CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP

Scale Mode

Window

Off

PCL default picture frame

(the PCL default logical page less 1/2 inch at

the top and the bottom)

Coordinate System Orientation

P1, P2

Orientation of PCL default logical page

coordinate system

Lower left, upper right corners, respectively,

of picture frame

4-6 Print Environment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note

Table 4-3 lists the User Default Environment. This print

environment is stored in non-volatile RAM (NVRAM),

which allows it to be retained in the event of a power cycle

(except for the HP LaserJ et 4L, 5L, and 6L printers, which

do not contain NVRAM). In earlier printers without PJ L,

the feature settings contained in the User Default Environ-

ment were selectable through the control panel only. In

newer printers with PJ L, these feature settings can be set

from either the control panel (if the printer has one) or

through PJ L or both.

The User Default Environment is reset to the Factory De-

fault Environment upon a cold reset.

Print Environment 4-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4-3.

User Default Environment

4ML,

Menu Item

Range

III

IIID

IIISi

IIIP

4Si

4P, 4PJ,

4 Plus,

4V,

4MP, 4LJ 4M Plus,

Pro, 4LC 5P, 5MP

4MV

✓

Copies

1* through 99¹

Portrait*, Land.

1-999 1-999 1-999

1-999

✓

Orientation

Font Source

2,3

✓

✓✓

✓

Internal*, Cart-

ridge, Soft Fonts

✓

Font Number

0* (Courier) to n

10.00* .44 - 99.99

12.00* 4 - 999.75

Roman-8*

✓

Pitch

Point Size⁵

✓

Symbol Set

✓

Form/Lines of 60* 5 - 128

Text⁶

✓

Paper (J ob)

Size

Letter*, Legal,

Executive, A4,

Com-10,

plus

plus B5 plus

plus

A3,

11x17and

more⁹

✓

Custom⁶

Monarch, DL, C5

✓

Manual Feed

Duplex

Off*, On

✓

Off* (simplex),On

✓

Binding

Long-edge*,

Short-edge

✓

Output Bin

Upper*, Lower

✓

Resolution

Enhancement

Medium*, Light,

Dark, Off

On/

Off

✓

Print Density

EconoMode

1, 2, 3*, 4, 5

On, Off*

✓

Resource

Saving

On, Off*

On,

Off,

On, Off,

Auto*

✓

- Supported

- Default value (see Chapter 3 for list) ns - Not Supported

PCL range is 1 through 32767

SIMMs also available

The HP LaserJet 4L, 4ML, 4PJ, and 4MP printers do not accept cartridges.

Displayed for fixed-spaced scalable fonts only

Displayed for proportional scalable fonts only

Sets PCL text length

For LaserJet 4PJ and 4LJ Pro, WIN3.1J is the default symbol set and MS Mincho is default typeface; for the LaserJet 4LC, GB2312 is the

default symbol set and SimSun is the default typeface. A4 is default paper size, 64 is default lines of text; printer also supports JIS B5

paper, Hagaki and Oufuku-Hagaki postcards.

Supported if duplex is installed (duplex is an option on LaserJet 4 Plus and 4M Plus)

LaserJet 4V/4MV also supports JIS B5, JIS B4, JPOST, JPOSTD, Commercial B5, and Custom (11.7" x 17.7").

4-8 Print Environment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4-3.

User Default Environment (continued)

Menu Item

Range

5, 5M

6P, 6MP

5Si

5SiMx

Color LaserJet DeskJet 1200C

DeskJet 1600C

5Si Mopier

1* through 999¹

Portrait*, Land.

✓

Copies

✓

Orientation

Font Source

Internal*,

Cartridge,

Soft Fonts

✓ (no

cartridges)

✓

(no

✓

(no

cartridges)

✓

Font Number

0* (Courier) to n

10.00* .44 - 99.99

12.00* 4 - 999.75

Roman-8*

✓

Pitch

Point Size³

✓

Symbol Set

Form/Lines Text⁴60* 5 - 128

PC-8*

✓

PC-8*

✓

Paper (J ob) Size

Letter*, Legal,

plus A4,

plus A4, A5,

Executive,

Envelopes

(Com10,

Monarch, C5,

DL, B5)

(6P/6MP also

includes

Custom,

plus A4,

Executive,

A3, B4, B5, Executive,

Ledger (11"

x 17"),

Envelopes

(Com-10,

Monarch,

DL, C5, B5

plus A4,

11x17, A3,

Executive,

Envelopes

(Com-10,

Monarch,

C5, DL, B5)

Custom

plus

COM10,

DL, C5

envelopes

(3" x 5" –

8.5" x 14")

J ISB5,

J POST,

J POSTD)

✓

Manual Feed

Duplex

Off*, On

✓

Off* (simplex),On

5/5M (option)

6P/6MP (ns)

✓

Binding

Long-edge*,

Short-edge

5/5M (w/

duplex option)

✓

Output Bin

(Media Bin)

Upper*, Lower

✓

Resolution

Enhancement

Medium*, Light,

Dark, Off, On

On*, Off

✓

Print Density

EconoMode

1, 2, 3*, 4, 5

On, Off*

✓

Resource

Saving

On, Off*

On, Off, Auto*

On, Off,

Auto*

On, Off,

Auto*

On, Off,

Auto*

✓

- Supported

- Default value (see Chapter 2 for list) ns - Not Supported

PCL range is 1 through 32767

Displayed for fixed-spaced scalable fonts only.

Displayed for proportional scalable fonts only

Sets PCL text length

Print Environment 4-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table 4-3. User Default Environment (continued)

Menu Item

Range

4000 series

✓

Copies

1* through 999¹

Portrait*, Land.

Orientation

Font Source

Internal*,

Cartridge,

Soft Fonts

✓

(no

cartridges)

Font Number

0* (Courier) to n

10.00* .44 - 99.99

12.00* 4 - 999.75

Roman-8*

✓

Pitch

Point Size³

✓

Symbol Set

Form/Lines Text⁴60* 5 - 128

✓

Paper (J ob) Size

Letter*, Legal,

plus A4, A5,

B5, J IS-B5,

Executive,

Envelopes

(Com10,

Monarch, C5,

DL, B5)

Manual Feed

Duplex

Off*, On

✓

Off* (simplex),On

option

Binding

Long-edge*,

Short-edge

(w/ duplex

option)

Output Bin

(Media Bin)

Upper*, Lower

✓

Resolution

Enhancement

Medium*, Light,

Dark, Off, On

Print Density

EconoMode

1, 2, 3*, 4, 5

On, Off*

✓

Resource

Saving

On, Off*

On, Off, Auto*

✓

- Supported

- Default value (see Chapter 2 for list) ns - Not Supported

PCL range is 1 through 32767

Displayed for fixed-spaced scalable fonts only.

Displayed for proportional scalable fonts only

Sets PCL text length

4-10 Print Environment

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Memory Usage

Introduction

In some situations, the amount of available memory for

printing pages may be smaller than that required for

printing. To make more effective use of the available printer

memory, newer HP PCL 5 printers incorporate new

methods for managing memory. This smaller amount of

available memory is made more usable by:

Memory Enhancement technology, MEt, (available on all

HP LaserJ et 6, LaserJ et 5, and LaserJ et 4 family

printers except the 4, 4M, 4Si and 4SiMx)

Adaptive Data Compression, ADC, (available on HP

LaserJ et 4, 4M, 4Si, 4SiMx and DeskJ et 1200C printers)

Following recommended practices for transmitting data,

especially raster graphics, to the printer

For the HP LaserJ et 4L, using Raster Graphics Adaptive

Compression (PCL compression mode five)

All HP LaserJ et 4, 5 and 6 family printers have internal

programming for optimizing the use of limited memory. HP

LaserJ et 4, 4M, 4Si, 4SiMx, and DeskJ et 1200C printers

compress raster graphics data using a system called

Adaptive Data Compression or ADC. The other HP

LaserJ et 4 / 5 / 6 printers use MEt to compress not only

raster graphics data, but also to compress fonts, improve

memory usage for page protection, and provide an overall

improvement in memory efficiency. Both systems operate

automatically and without any intervention from the user.

The HP Color LaserJ et printer has memory management

features similar to MEt, but has additional features for

color processing.

Memory Usage 5-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Operation of ADC

and MEt

The goal of ADC is to automatically and transparently

reduce Memory Out errors caused by raster graphics pages.

MEt extends this goal to reducing all Memory Out errors

and eliminating Print Overrun errors.

During the printing of a page, if available printer memory

becomes low, all HP LaserJ et 4, 5, and 6 family printers

and the HP Color LaserJ et printer have the ability to

automatically compress any already-stored raster graphics

data using a variety of compression techniques. This allows

the printing of many raster graphics pages which would

have caused a Memory Out error on previous HP LaserJ et

printers having the same amount of memory.

With ADC or MEt, PCL 5 printers can typically print a full

page of raster graphics in base memory without a memory

out. This is especially true for line art and typical business

graphics. Other types of graphics such as scanned

photographs (especially if a technique called error-diffusion

is used), cannot always be printed as easily by ADC or MEt

as can line art graphics. Fortunately, another internal

printer feature, Im a ge Ad a p t, can be called upon to make

the page fit in memory.

Image Adapt

Image Adapt is only used as a last resort for compressing

raster graphics data and as such will rarely be seen. It

reduces a raster graphic image to one-fourth its original

size by trading off some of the image’s fine detail. This loss

of fine detail is often not noticeable.

Image Adapt can be disabled on some of the HP LaserJ et 4,

5, and 6 family printers if required, but the technique

varies. On the HP LaserJ et 4, 4M and 4Si the user will

have to add more memory to effectively remove the need for

Image Adapt. Image Adapt can be disabled on some of the

other HP LaserJ et 4, 5, and 6 family printers by using a

PJ L command (refer to the respective printer user manuals

for further information—the Color LaserJ et printer does

not utilize Image Adapt). If Image Adapt is turned off, more

pages will cause Memory Out errors.

5-2 Memory Usage

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

All HP LaserJ et 4, 5, and 6 family printers also include

enhancements to improve the internal storage of raster

graphics data.

Additional MEt

Features

With MEt, font data can also be compressed. All

downloaded bitmap characters and characters scaled from

internal or downloaded scalable outlines can be

compressed. The amount of memory savings varies with the

size of the characters involved (larger is better) but

character sizes can typically be cut in half. This allows

roughly twice as many fonts to be downloaded or scaled

using a MEt-enhanced LaserJ et printer as previously

allowed on printers without MEt.

In prior PCL 5 printers, if the page could not be rendered as

fast as the laser printed it, a Print Overrun error occurred

unless page protection was manually turned on and

memory was added to accommodate it. With MEt, the

manual setting of Page Protection and the additional

memory required to facilitate it is obsolete. MEt

automatically assesses the complexity of the page being

printed and if too complex turns on a new form of page

protection which uses compression to remove the

requirement for additional memory.

In rare circumstances MEt’s assessment of the page may

prove to be incorrect. For these cases there is some amount

of control over this Page Protection process depending upon

which MEt-equipped printer is being used. Page Protection

may be explicitly turned on or off to avoid the complexity

assessment and either always or never perform the page

protection process. See the appropriate user manual for

details.

MEt also includes other internal memory-saving techniques

which improve the amount of memory required for the

printer ’s internal representation of your page.

Memory Usage 5-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ADC and MEt Notes

For raster graphics compression to perform at its best it is

recommended that the “Recommendations For Sending

Data to the Printer,” described below, be followed.

Character bitmaps can only be compressed if they can be

stored uncompressed in contiguous printer memory first.

This requirement implies that large point size characters

may require more printer memory than would seem

necessary.

During MEt’s Page Protection, portions of the internal

representation of the page are discarded to make room for

other aspects of the page protection process. If a memory

out condition occurs during this process (unlikely, but

possible) a white band will be seen on the page. The best

way to remedy this situation is to add memory to the

printer.

Recommendations

For Sending Data to

the Printer

The HP PCL 5 printers perform best in terms of speed and

memory utilization if the recommendations made below are

followed. Failure to follow these recommendations will not

harm the printer, but may increase the chances of a

memory out condition or increase the time to print a page.

Or d er ed Im a ges — Raster Graphic images or pictures

should be sent from top to bottom with the data in one

band (start raster, end raster pair). If one band is not

possible, as few as possible multiple bands may be used

as long as they exactly follow each other and are sent in

top-to-bottom order. Also, multiple bands should be as

large as possible.

Ba n d Sizes — If an image is sent in bands (start raster,

end raster pairs), the bands should be multiples of 32

lines high. This is especially critical for landscape

graphics. If there is no way to send multiples of 32-line

high bands, multiples of four for band height should be

used. This allows Image Adapt to work better.

5-4 Memory Usage

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Avoid Non -Ra ster Com m a n d s — During the

transmission of sequential raster bands non-raster

commands should be avoided. This includes cursor

positioning commands.

Sep a r a tion of Im a ges — If more than one image or

picture is to be printed on a page, it is best to keep them

separate. Separation consists of assuring that the new

image starts with a new start raster command and that

the one image does not exactly follow the next image

(separate the image by at least one line vertically and

sixteen pixels horizontally). This constraint improves the

operation of Image Adapt.

Recta n gu la r Im a ges — All HP LaserJ et 4 family

printers perform best if raster images are sent as

rectangular images to the printer. This entails keeping

the right margin of the image constant and keeping all

lines the full image width (no lines are truncated). Also,

avoid skipping lines. When whole blank lines appear in

the image, either send zeroed data row(s) or use the

Raster Y-Offset command.

Avoid Un n ecessa r y P r in t Mod el Use — Print model

modes, other than source and pattern transparent,

degrade memory efficiency. (This restriction is not true

for the HP Color LaserJ et printer.) For best results do

not use an opaque source unless there is an image known

to already be on the page in the same area. Following the

other rules listed in this section minimizes the impact of

using non-transparent print model modes.

Avoid Ta ll, Na r r ow Im a ges — For ADC, images which

are taller than they are wide by more than eight to one

disable the printer ’s ability to automatically separate

images upon the page (this restriction is not true for the

HP Color LaserJ et printer). This violation is desirable in

the case where the above rules are violated and multiple

images are rendered as one image and sent to the printer

as one combined image. Sending raster data as a

checkerboard with non-full width bands sent left to right

and top to bottom also disables the printer ’s automatic

Memory Usage 5-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

image separation. In general, for all HP LaserJ et

printers, tall, narrow images should be avoided since

they typically require more memory.

Wid e P a tter n s — Patterns can use up a lot of

memory— avoid them if possible. Avoid patterns which,

in their final orientation, are not 1, 2, 4, 8, 16 or 32 (32 is

for all but the 4L) bits wide. Patterns of other sizes will

be tiled out to the full width of the page and can consume

a large amount of memory (since the HP Color LaserJ et

printer does not perform this way, it is not a factor for

this printer). Note that a landscape pattern that is 16

wide by 5 high would become 5 wide by 16 high when

rotated and be subjected to being tiled across the page.

Avoid Un n ecessa r y P a tter n Selection — In HP-GL/2,

avoid issuing redundant Fill Type (FT) and Line Type

(LT) commands. These commands may cause patterns to

be rebuilt and tiled for each invocation.

Avoid Ma n y Sm a ll P olygon s — In HP-GL/2 avoid

entering and exiting polygon mode repeatedly as it

fragments memory. If possible send down fewer, larger

polygons.

Dow n loa d F on t Ch a r a cter s a s Need ed — All PCL 5

printers operate best if fonts and outlines downloaded do

not include information for characters which are not

used upon the current page. It is also best to download

bitmap characters in the orientation which they will be

used.

Note

When deleting font characters and patterns, remember that

if a pattern or font character is used on the current page,

any deletion commands affecting it will not be executed

until the page is printed.

5-6 Memory Usage

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Raster Graphics

Adaptive

Compression

(Method 5)

Raster Graphics Adaptive Compression (Set Compression

Method Command, mode 5) is implemented on the HP

LaserJ et IIIP, Color LaserJ et, all LaserJ et 4, 5, and 6

family printers, and the DeskJ et 1200C and 1600C printers.

This compression method allows the host to compress data

using a combination of PCL compression modes to obtain

optimum compression (refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language

Technical Reference manual, Set Compression Method

Command, for details).

An added benefit of this method for the HP LaserJ et 4L and

LaserJ et IIIP printers is that the data is not decompressed

upon entry to the printer provided the image is portrait,

300 dpi, transparent print model and no patterns are being

used. This allows the LaserJ et 4L and IIIP to print many

pages which would otherwise require more memory. As an

added benefit these pages print faster. The other HP

LaserJ et 4, 5, and 6 family printers decompress the data

upon entry to the printer and rely upon ADC or MEt to

compress the data if required.

For the HP LaserJ et 4L printer it is critical that the image

actually compress (not expand) if Adaptive Compression is

used since MEt does not operate upon images meeting the

requirements for delayed decompression.

Memory Usage 5-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

5-8 Memory Usage

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Printer Commands

Introduction

This appendix lists HP printer language commands. Table

A-1 lists PCL 5 commands in hierarchical order and gives

the decimal and hexadecimal equivalents of each. Table A-2

lists HP-GL/2 commands, where as Table A-3 lists control

codes.

Note

Values in parentheses “(x)” identify the lower case of the

termination character which is used for combining

commands.

Printer Commands A-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

JOB CONTROL COMMANDS

Reset

Configuration

(AppleTalk)

Key/Value data

pair

?&b#W[data]

?%–12345X

027 038 098 #...# 87

1B 26 62 #...# 57

Universal Exit

Language (ULE)

—

027 037 045 049 050 051 052 053 088

1B 25 2D 31 32 33 34 35 58

1B 45

Reset

—

027 069

Number of Copies

# of Copies

Simplex

?&l#X

?&l0S

(x) 027 038 108 #...# 088

(s) 027 038 108 048 083

(120) 1B 26 6C #...# 58

(78)

(73)

Simplex/Duplex

(115) 1B 26 6C 30 53

Duplex

Long Edge

Binding

?&l1S

?&l2S

?&l#U

?&l#Z

(s) 027 038 108 049 083

(s) 027 038 108 050 083

(u) 027 038 108 #...# 085

(z) 027 038 108 #...# 090

(115) 1B 26 6C 31 53

(115) 1B 26 6C 32 53

(117) 1B 26 6C #...# 55

(122) 1B 26 6C #...# 5A

(73)

(75)

(7A)

Short Edge

Binding

Long-Edge (Left) Offset

Registration

# of Decipoints

(1/720")

Short-Edge (Top) Offset

Registration

# of Decipoints

(1/720")

Page Side Selection

Next Side

Front Side

Back Side

—

?&a0G

?&a1G

?&a2G

?&l1T

(g) 027 038 097 048 071

(g) 027 038 097 049 071

(g) 027 038 097 050 071

(t) 027 038 108 049 084

(g) 027 038 108 048 071

(g) 027 038 108 049 071

(103) 1B 26 61 30 47

(103) 1B 26 61 31 47

(103) 1B 26 61 32 47

(116) 1B 26 6C 31 54

(103) 1B 26 6C 30 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 31 47

(67)

(74)

(67)

J ob Separation

Output (Media) Bin

Selection

Automatic selection ?&l0G

Upper Output Bin

(Bin #1)

?&l1G

Rear Output Bin¹

(Bin #2)

?&l2G

(g) 027 038 108 050 071

(103) 1B 26 6C 32 47

(67)

Selects Bin #3

Selects Bin #4

Selects Bin #5

Selects Bin #6

Selects Bin #7

Selects Bin #8

Selects Bin #9

Selects Bin #10

Selects Bin #11

?&l3G

?&l4G

?&l5G

?&l6G

?&l7G

?&l8G

?&l9G

?&l10G

?&l11G

(g) 027 038 108 051 071

(g) 027 038 108 052 071

(g) 027 038 108 053 071

(g) 027 038 108 054 071

(g) 027 038 108 055 071

(g) 027 038 108 056 071

(g) 027 038 108 057 071

(g) 027 038 108 049 048 071

(g) 027 038 108 049 049 071

(103) 1B 26 6C 33 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 34 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 35 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 36 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 37 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 38 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 39 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 31 30 47

(103) 1B 26 6C 31 31 47

(67)

For HP LaserJet 5Si/5SiMx printers, ?&l2G selects the “printer left/face up bin,” which is not available when the High Capacity Output

(HCO) is attached.

A-2 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

Unit of

Measure

PARAMETER

# Number of units ?&u#D

per inch

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

027 038 117 #...# 068

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

(d)

(100) 1B 26 75 #...# 44

(64)

Mechanical Print

Quality

Normal

?*o0Q

(q)

027 042 111 048 081

(113) 1B 2A 6F 30 51

(71)

Better

?*o1Q

(q)

027 042 111 049 081

027 042 111 050 081

027 038 108 048 077

027 038 108 049 077

027 038 108 050 077

027 038 108 051 077

027 038 108 052 077

027 038 097 048 078

(113) 1B 2A 6F 31 51

(113) 1B 2A 6F 32 51

(109) 1B 26 6C 30 4D

(109) 1B 26 6C 31 4D

(109) 1B 26 6C 32 4D

(109) 1B 26 6C 33 4D

(109) 1B 26 6C 34 4D

(110) 1B 26 61 30 4E

(71)

(6D)

(6E)

Best

?*o2Q

(q)

Media Type

Plain

?&l0M

?&l1M

?&l2M

?&l3M

?&l4M

(m)

(n)

Bond

Special

Glossy

Transparency

Negative Motion

Contains negative ?&a0N

motion

Does not contain

negative motion

?&a1N

(n)

027 038 097 049 078

(110) 1B 26 61 31 4E

(6E)

PAGE CONTROL COMMANDS

Page Length and Size

Paper Source

Eject Page

?&l0H

(h)

027 038 108 048 072

027 038 108 049 072

027 038 108 050 072

027 038 108 051 072

(104) 1B 26 6C 30 48

(104) 1B 26 6C 31 48

(104) 1B 26 6C 32 48

(104) 1B 26 6C 33 48

(68)

Main Paper Source ?&l1H

Manual Feed

?&l2H

?&l3H

Manual Envelope

Feed

Alternate Paper

Source

?&l4H

?&l5H

(h)

027 038 108 052 072

027 038 108 053 072

(104) 1B 26 6C 34 48

(104) 1B 26 6C 35 48

(68)

Optional Large

Paper Source

Envelope Feeder

Auto Select

?&l6H

?&l7H

(h)

(a)

027 038 108 054 072

(104) 1B 26 6C 36 48

(104) 1B 26 6C 37 48

(104) 1B 26 6C 38 48

(68)

(61)

027 038 108 055 072

Tray 1 (right tray) ?&l8H

027 038 108 056 072

Page Size

Executive

Letter

?&l1A

?&l2A

?&l3A

?&l6A

?&l27A

?&l26A

?&l25A

?&l24A

?&l46A

?&l45A

?&l44A

?&l71A

?&l72A

027 038 108 049 065

(97)

1B 26 6C 31 41

027 038 108 050 065

1B 26 6C 32 41

Legal

027 038 108 051 065

1B 26 6C 33 41

Ledger

027 038 108 054 065

1B 26 6C 36 41

027 038 108 050 055 065

027 038 108 050 054 065

027 038 108 050 053 065

027 038 108 050 052 065

027 038 108 052 054 065

027 038 108 052 053 065

027 038 108 052 052 065

027 038 108 055 049 065

027 038 108 055 050 065

027 038 108 056 048 065

027 038 108 056 049 065

027 038 108 057 048 065

027 038 108 057 049 065

027 038 108 049 048 048 065

027 038 108 049 048 049 065

1B 26 6C 32 37 41

1B 26 6C 32 36 41

1B 26 6C 32 35 41

1B 26 6C 32 34 41

1B 26 6C 34 36 41

1B 26 6C 34 35 41

1B 26 6C 34 34 41

1B 26 6C 37 31 41

1B 26 6C 37 32 41

1B 26 6C 38 30 41

1B 26 6C 38 31 41

1B 26 6C 39 30 41

1B 26 6C 39 31 41

1B 26 6C 31 30 30 41

1B 26 6C 31 30 31 41

J IS B4 Paper

J IS B5 Paper

J IS B6 Paper

Hagaki Postcard

Oufuku-Hagaki

Monarch Envelope ?&l80A

COM 10 Envelope ?&l81A

DL Envelope

C5 Envelope

B5 Envelope

Custom

?&l90A

?&l91A

?&l100A

?&l101A

Printer Commands A-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

Orientation

(o) 027 038 108 048 079

(o) 027 038 108 049 079

(o) 027 038 108 050 079

(o) 027 038 108 051 079

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

1B 26 6C 30 4F

Orientation

Portrait

?&l0O

(111)

(6F)

Landscape

Reverse Portrait

?&l1O

?&l2O

?&l3O

1B 26 6C 31 4F

1B 26 6C 32 4F

1B 26 6C 33 4F

Reverse

Landscape

Print Direction

# Degrees of

Rotation (counter-

clockwise,

?&a#P

(p) 027 038 097 #...# 080

(112) 1B 26 61 #...# 50

(70)

90° increments

only)

Character Text

Path Direction

Horizontal

Vertical Rotated

?&c0T

?&c–1T

(t) 027 038 099 048 084

(t) 027 038 099 045 049 084

(116) 1B 26 63 30 54

(116) 1B 26 63 2D 31 54

(74)

Margins and Text Length

(e) 027 038 108 #...# 069

(f) 027 038 108 #...# 070

(l) 027 038 097 #...# 076

(m) 027 038 097 #...# 077

027 057

Top Margin

Text Length

Left Margin

Right Margin

# of Lines

# of Columns

—

?&l#E

?&l#F

?&a#L

?&a#M

(101) 1B 26 6C #...# 45

(102) 1B 26 6C #...# 46

(108) 1B 26 61 #...# 4C

(109) 1B 26 61 #...# 4D

1B 39

(65)

(66)

(6C)

(6D)

Clear Horizontal

Margins

Perforation Skip Mode

(l) 027 038 108 048 076

(l) 027 038 108 049 076

Perforation Skip

Disable

Enable

?&l0L

?&l1L

(108) 1B 26 6C 30 4C

(108) 1B 26 6C 31 4C

(6C)

Horizontal Column Spacing

Horizontal Motion

Index (HMI)

# of 1/120"

Increments

?&k#H

(h) 027 038 107 #...# 072

(104) 1B 26 6B #...# 48

(68)

Vertical Line Spacing

Vertical Motion In- # of 1/48"

?&l#C

?&l1D

(99)

1B 26 6C #...# 43

(63)

(64)

dex (VMI)

Increments

Line Spacing

1 line/inch

(d) 027 038 108 049 068

(100) 1B 26 6C 31 44

(Lines per inch)

2 lines/inch

3 lines/inch

4 lines/inch

6 lines/inch

8 lines/inch

12 lines/inch

16 lines/inch

24 lines/inch

48 lines/inch

?&l2D

?&l3D

?&l4D

?&l6D

?&l8D

?&l12D

?&l16D

?&l24D

?&l48D

(d) 027 038 108 050 068

(d) 027 038 108 051 068

(d) 027 038 108 052 068

(d) 027 038 108 054 068

(d) 027 038 108 056 068

(d) 027 038 108 049 050 068

(d) 027 038 108 049 054 068

(d) 027 038 108 050 052 068

(d) 027 038 108 052 056 068

(100) 1B 26 6C 32 44

(100) 1B 26 6C 33 44

(100) 1B 26 6C 34 44

(100) 1B 26 6C 36 44

(100) 1B 26 6C 38 44

(100) 1B 26 6C 31 32 44

(100) 1B 26 6C 31 36 44

(100) 1B 26 6C 32 34 44

(100) 1B 26 6C 34 38 44

(64)

ALPHANUMERIC ID

Alphanumeric ID

# of bytes

?&n#W[operation]

[String]

027 038 110 #...# 087

1B 26 6E #...# 57

A-4 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

CURSOR POSITIONING

Vertical and Horizontal

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

Vertical Position

# of Rows

# of Units

?&a#R

?*p#Y

?&a#V

?&a#C

?*p#X

?&a#H

(r) 027 038 097 #...# 082

(y) 027 042 112 #...# 089

(v) 027 038 097 #...# 086

(x) 027 042 112 #...# 088

(h) 027 038 097 #...# 072

027 061

(114) 1B 26 61 #...# 52

(72)

(79)

(76)

(63)

(78)

(68)

(121) 1B 2A 70 #...# 59

(118) 1B 26 61 #...# 56

# of Decipoints

# of Columns

# of Units

Horizontal Position

(99)

1B 26 61 #...# 43

(120) 1B 2A 70 #...# 58

(104) 1B 26 61 #...# 48

1B 3D

# of Decipoints

Half Line Feed

End-of-Line Termination

Line Termination

CR=CR; LF=LF; FF=FF

?&k0G

?&k1G

?&k2G

?&k3G

(g) 027 038 107 048 071

(103) 1B 26 6B 30 47

(103) 1B 26 6B 31 47

(103) 1B 26 6B 32 47

(103) 1B 26 6B 33 47

(67)

CR=CR+LF; LF=LF; FF=FF

CR=CR; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF

CR=CR+LF; LF=CR+LF; FF=CR+FF

(g) 027 038 107 049 071

(g) 027 038 107 050 071

(g) 027 038 107 051 071

Push/Pop Position

?&f0S

Push/Pop Position

Push

Pop

(s) 027 038 102 048 083

(s) 027 038 102 049 083

(115) 1B 26 66 30 53

(115) 1B 26 66 31 53

(73)

?&f1S

FONT SELECTION

Symbol Set Selection¹

Primary Symbol Set

ISO 60: Norwegian 1

ISO 4: United Kingdom

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

ISO 69: French

?(0D

?(1E

?(9E

?(1F

?(1G

?(0I

027 040 048 068

027 040 049 069

027 040 057 069

027 040 049 070

027 040 049 071

027 040 048 073

027 040 054 074

1B 28 30 44

1B 28 31 45

1B 28 39 45

1B 28 31 46

1B 28 31 47

1B 28 30 49

1B 28 36 4A

ISO 21: German

ISO 15: Italian

Microsoft Publishing

?(6J

Additional symbol sets are supported, refer to Table C-1 for a list of these symbol sets.

Printer Commands A-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

1B 28 37 4A

Symbol Set Selection¹- continued

Primary Symbol Set

DeskTop

?(7J

027 040 055 074

PS Text

?(10J

?(12J

?(13J

?(14J

?(9L

027 040 049 048 074

027 040 049 050 074

027 040 049 051 074

027 040 049 052 074

027 040 057 076

1B 28 31 30 4A

1B 28 31 32 4A

1B 28 31 33 4A

1B 28 31 34 4A

1B 28 39 4C

MC Text

Ventura International

Ventura US

Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats

PS ITC Zapf Dingbats

?(10L

027 040 049 048 076

027 040 049 049 076

027 040 049 050 076

027 040 049 051 076

027 040 053 055 057 076

027 040 053 077

1B 28 31 30 4C

1B 28 31 31 4C

1B 28 31 32 4C

1B 28 31 33 4C

1B 28 35 37 39 4C

1B 28 35 4D

ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 100 ?(11L

ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 200 ?(12L

ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 300 ?(13L

Wingdings

PS Math

?(579L

?(5M

Ventura Math

Math-8

?(6M

027 040 054 077

1B 28 36 4D

?(8M

027 040 056 077

1B 28 38 4D

Symbol

?(19M

027 040 049 057 077

027 040 048 078

1B 28 31 39 4D

1B 28 30 4E

ISO 8859-1 (ECMA-94) Latin 1 ?(0N

ISO 8859-2: Latin 2

ISO 8859-9: Latin 5

ISO 11: Swedish

ISO 17: Spanish

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

PC 1004

?(2N

?(5N

?(0S

?(2S

?(5T

?(9J

027 040 050 078

1B 28 32 4E

027 040 053 078

1B 28 35 4E

027 040 048 083

1B 28 30 53

027 040 050 083

1B 28 32 53

027 040 053 084

1B 28 35 54

027 040 057 074

1B 28 39 4A

1B 28 32 36 55

1B 28 31 4C

PC 775

?(26U

?(19L

?(6N

027 040 050 054 085

027 040 049 076

Windows Baltic

ISO 8859-10: Latin 6

027 040 054 078

1B 28 36 4E

Additional symbol sets are supported, refer to Table C-1 for a list of these symbol sets.

A-6 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER COMMAND

Symbol Set Selection¹- continued

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

Primary Symbol Set

PC Turkish

?(9T

027 040 057 084

1B 28 39 54

ISO 6: ASCII

Legal

?(0U

027 040 048 085

1B 28 30 55

?(1U

027 040 049 085

1B 28 31 55

Roman-8

?(8U

027 040 056 085

1B 28 38 55

Windows 3.0 Latin 1

PC-8

?(9U

027 040 057 085

1B 28 39 55

?(10U

?(11U

?(12U

?(15U

?(17U

?(19U

?(19K

027 040 049 048 085

027 040 049 049 085

027 040 049 050 085

027 040 049 053 085

027 040 049 055 085

027 040 049 057 085

027 040 049 057 075

1B 28 31 30 55

1B 28 31 31 55

1B 28 31 32 55

1B 28 31 35 55

1B 28 31 37 55

1B 28 31 39 55

1B 28 31 39 4B

PC-8 D/N

PC-850

Pi Font

PC-852

Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (ANSI)

Windows 3.1J (J apanese)

Spacing

Primary Spacing

Fixed

?(s0P

?(s1P

(p)

027 040 115 048 080

027 040 115 049 080

(112) 1B 28 73 30 50

(70)

Proportional

(112) 1B 28 73 31 50

Pitch

Primary Pitch

Set Pitch Mode

# Characters/inch

10.0

?(s#H

(h)

(s)

027 040 115 #...# 072

027 038 107 048 083

027 038 107 050 083

027 038 107 052 083

(104) 1B 28 73 #...# 48

(115) 1B 26 6B 30 53

(115) 1B 26 6B 32 53

(115) 1B 26 6B 34 53

(68)

(73)

?&k0S

?&k2S

?&k4S

Compressed (16.5-16.7)

Elite (12.0)

Point Size

?(s#V

Primary Height

# Points

(v)

027 040 115 #...# 086

(118) 1B 28 73 #...# 56

(76)

Additional symbol sets are supported, refer to Table C-1 for a list of these symbol sets.

Printer Commands A-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

Style

DECIMAL VALUE

027 040 115 048 083

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

Primary Style

Upright (Solid)

?(s0S

(s)

(115) 1B 28 73 30 53

(73)

Italic

?(s1S

027 040 115 049 083

(115) 1B 28 73 31 53

Condensed

?(s4S

027 040 115 052 083

(115) 1B 28 73 34 53

Condensed Italic

Compressed (Extra Condensed)

Expanded

?(s5S

027 040 115 053 083

(115) 1B 28 73 35 53

?(s8S

027 040 115 056 083

(115) 1B 28 73 38 53

?(s24S

?(s32S

?(s64S

?(s128S

?(s160S

027 040 115 050 052 083

027 040 115 051 050 083

027 040 115 054 052 083

027 040 115 049 050 056 083

027 040 115 049 054 048 083

(115) 1B 28 73 32 34 53

(115) 1B 28 73 33 32 53

(115) 1B 28 73 36 34 53

(115) 1B 28 73 31 32 38 53

(115) 1B 28 73 31 36 30 53

Outline

Inline

Shadowed

Outline Shadowed

Additional style values may be obtained from the related documentation provided with HP’s font products.

PCL 5 LaserJ et Printers allows the specification of complex structures (contours, outlines, shading, etc.) and widths as well as posture.

Refer to the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference Manual.

Stroke Weight

Primary Font

Stroke Weight

Ultra Thin

Extra Thin

Thin

?(s–7B

?(s–6B

?(s–5B

?(s–4B

?(s–3B

?(s–2B

?(s–1B

?(s0B

?(s1B

?(s2B

?(s3B

?(s4B

?(s5B

?(s6B

?(s7B

(b)

027 040 115 045 055 066

027 040 115 045 054 066

027 040 115 045 053 066

027 040 115 045 052 066

027 040 115 045 051 066

027 040 115 045 050 066

027 040 115 045 049 066

027 040 115 048 066

027 040 115 049 066

027 040 115 050 066

027 040 115 051 066

027 040 115 052 066

027 040 115 053 066

027 040 115 054 066

027 040 115 055 066

(98) 1B 28 73 2D 37 42

(98) 1B 28 73 2D 36 42

(98) 1B 28 73 2D 35 42

(98) 1B 28 73 2D 34 42

(98) 1B 28 73 2D 33 42

(98) 1B 28 73 2D 32 42

(98) 1B 28 73 2D 31 42

(98) 1B 28 73 30 42

(98) 1B 28 73 31 42

(98) 1B 28 73 32 42

(98) 1B 28 73 33 42

(98) 1B 28 73 34 42

(98) 1B 28 73 35 42

(98) 1B 28 73 36 42

(98) 1B 28 73 37 42

(62)

Extra Light

Light

Demi Light

Semi Light

Medium (book or text)

Semi Bold

Demi Bold

Bold

Extra Bold

Black

Extra Black

Ultra Black

A-8 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

(116) 1B 28 73 30 54

Primary Typeface Family ¹

Typeface Family

LinePrinter

?(s0T

(t) 027 040 115 048 084

(74)

Albertus

?(s4362T

?(s4168T

?(s4140T

?(s4116T

?(s3T

(t) 027 040 115 052 051 054 050 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 054 056 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 052 048 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 049 054 084

(t) 027 040 115 051 084

(116) 1B 28 73 34 33 36 32 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 36 38 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 34 30 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 31 36 54

(116) 1B 28 73 33 54

Antique Olive

Clarendon

Coronet

Courier

GW-Kai

?(s37357T

?(s4099T

?(s4141T

?(s4197T

?(s4102T

?(s4297T

?(s4113T

?(s4101T

?(s4148T

?(s16602T

?(s28752T

?(s28825T

?(s16901T

?(s37110T

?(s37058T

?(s16686T

?(s6826T

?(s31402T

(t) 027 040 115 051 055 051 053 055 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 048 057 057 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 052 049 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 057 055 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 048 050 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 050 057 055 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 049 051 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 048 049 084

(t) 027 040 115 052 049 052 056 084

(t) 027 040 115 049 054 054 048 050 084

(t) 027 040 115 050 056 055 053 050 084

(t) 027 040 115 050 056 056 050 053 084

(t) 027 040 115 049 054 057 048 049 084

(t) 027 040 115 051 055 049 049 048 084

(t) 027 040 115 051 055 048 053 056 084

(t) 027 040 115 049 054 054 056 054 084

(t) 027 040 115 054 056 050 054 084

(t) 027 040 115 051 049 052 048 050 084

(116) 1B 28 73 33 37 33 35 37 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 30 39 39 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 34 31 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 39 37 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 30 32 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 32 39 37 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 31 33 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 30 31 54

(116) 1B 28 73 34 31 34 38 54

(116) 1B 28 73 31 36 36 30 32 54

(116) 1B 28 73 32 38 37 35 32 54

(116) 1B 28 73 32 38 38 32 35 54

(116) 1B 28 73 31 36 39 30 31 54

(116) 1B 28 73 33 37 31 31 30 54

(116) 1B 28 73 33 37 30 35 38 54

(116) 1B 28 73 31 36 36 38 36 54

(116) 1B 28 73 36 38 32 36 54

(116) 1B 28 73 33 31 34 30 32 54

Courier

ITC Zapf Dingbats

Garamond Antiqua

Letter Gothic

Marigold

CG Omega

CG Times

Univers

Arial

MS Mincho

MS Gothic

Times New Roman

SimHei

SimSun

Symbol

Wingdings

FONT DEFAULT

027 040 051 064

027 041 051 064

Font Default

Underline

Primary Font

?(3@

?)3@

1B 28 33 40

1B 29 33 40

Secondary Font

UNDERLINE

(d) 027 038 100 048 068

(d) 027 038 100 051 068

027 038 100 064

Enable Fixed

Enable Floating

Disable

?&d0D

?&d3D

?&d@

(100) 1B 26 64 30 44

(100) 1B 26 64 33 44

1B 26 64 40

(64)

TEXT PARSING METHOD

Text Parsing Method 1-Byte

1-Byte

?&t0P

(p) 027 038 116 48 080

(p) 027 038 116 49 080

(p) 027 038 116 050 049 080

(p) 027 038 116 051 049 080

(p) 027 038 116 051 056 080

(112) 1B 26 74 30 50

(112) 1B 26 74 31 50

(112) 1B 26 74 32 31 50

(112) 1B 26 74 33 31 50

(112) 1B 26 74 33 38 50

(70)

?&t1P

1-Byte/2-Byte

?&t21P

?&t31P

?&t38P

TRANSPARENT PRINT DATA

Transparent Print

Data

# of Bytes

?&p#X[Data]

027 038 112 #...# 088

1B 26 70 #...# 58

Additional typefaces are supported, refer to Table C-2 and C-3 for a list of these symbol sets.

Printer Commands A-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

027 042 099 #...# 068

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

FONT MANAGEMENT

Assign Font ID

Font ID #

?*c#D

?*c0F

?*c1F

?*c2F

(d)

(f)

(100) 1B 2A 63 #...# 44

(64)

(66)

Font and Character Control

Delete all Fonts

027 042 099 048 070

027 042 099 049 070

027 042 099 050 070

027 042 099 051 070

027 042 099 052 070

027 042 099 053 070

027 042 099 054 070

(102) 1B 2A 63 30 46

(102) 1B 2A 63 31 46

(102) 1B 2A 63 32 46

(102) 1B 2A 63 33 46

(102) 1B 2A 63 34 46

(102) 1B 2A 63 35 46

(102) 1B 2A 63 36 46

Delete all temporary fonts

Delete last font ID specified

Delete last character specified ?*c3F

Make font temporary

?*c4F

?*c5F

?*c6F

Make font permanent

Copy/Assign the currently

invoked font as temporary

Soft Symbol Set Management / Creation

Set Symbol Set

ID #

?*c#R

(r)

027 042 099 #...# 082

027 040 102 #...# 087

027 042 099 048 083

027 042 099 049 083

(114) 1B 2A 63 #...# 52

1B 28 66 #...# 57

(72)

Define Symbol Set

Symbol Set Control

# of Bytes

?(f#W[Data]

?*c0S

Delete all symbol sets

(s)

(115) 1B 2A 63 30 53

(115) 1B 2A 63 31 53

(73)

Delete all temporary symbol

sets

?*c1S

Delete current

soft symbol set

(last ID#)

?*c2S

(s)

027 042 099 050 083

(115) 1B 2A 63 32 53

(73)

Make current soft symbol set

temporary

?*c4S

?*c5S

(s)

027 042 099 052 083

027 042 099 053 083

(115) 1B 2A 63 34 53

(115) 1B 2A 63 35 53

(73)

Make current soft symbol set

permanent

A-10 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

Font Selection by ID Number

Select font (with ID #)

ID # primary font

?(#X

?)#X

027 040 #...# 088

1B 28 #...# 58

1B 29 #...# 58

ID # secondary font

027 041 #...# 088

SOFT FONT CREATION

Font descriptor

(font header)

# of bytes

?)s#W[Data]

027 041 115 #...# 087

1B 29 73 #...# 57

1B 28 73 #...# 57

Download character

Character code

?(s#W[Data]

027 040 115 #...# 087

027 042 099 #...# 069

Character code # (decimal) ?*c#E

(e)

(101) 1B 2A 63 #...# 45

(65)

(72)

GRAPHICS

Raster Graphics

Raster

75 dots/inch

100 dots/inch

150 dots/inch

200 dots/inch

300 dots/inch

600 dots/inch

?*t75R

(r)

027 042 116 055 053 082

(114) 1B 2A 74 37 35 52

Resolution

?*t100R

?*t150R

?*t200R

?*t300R

?*t600R

027 042 116 049 048 048 082

027 042 116 049 053 048 082

027 042 116 050 048 048 082

027 042 116 051 048 048 082

027 042 116 054 048 048 082

(114) 1B 2A 74 31 30 30 52 (72)

(114) 1B 2A 74 31 35 30 52 (72)

(114) 1B 2A 74 32 30 30 52 (72)

(114) 1B 2A 74 33 30 30 52 (72)

(114) 1B 2A 74 36 30 30 52 (72)

Printer Commands A-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

Raster Graphics

?*r0F

Raster Graphics Presentation

Start Raster Graphics

Follows orientation

(f)

027 042 114 048 070

027 042 114 051 070

027 042 114 048 065

027 042 114 049 065

027 042 114 050 065

(102) 1B 2A 72 30 46

(66)

(61)

Follows physical page

Left Raster Graphics Margin

Current Cursor

?*r3F

(f)

(102) 1B 2A 72 33 46

(97) 1B 2A 72 30 41

(97) 1B 2A 72 31 41

(97) 1B 2A 72 32 41

?*r0A

(a)

?*r1A

Scale mode (logical left page

boundary)

?*r2A

Scale mode (at CAP)

?*r3A

?*b#Y

(a)

(y)

027 042 114 051 065

027 042 098 #...# 089

(97) 1B 2A 72 33 42

(121) 1B 2A 62 #...# 59

(61)

(79)

Raster Y Offset

# of Raster Lines of vertical

movement

Set Raster Compression Mode

Unencoded

?*b0M

(m)

027 042 098 048 077

027 042 098 049 077

027 042 098 050 077

027 042 098 051 077

027 042 098 053 077

027 042 098 057 077

027 042 098 #...# 087

027 042 062 #...# 086

(109) 1B 2A 62 30 4D

(109) 1B 2A 62 31 4D

(109) 1B 2A 62 32 4D

(109) 1B 2A 62 33 4D

(109) 1B 2A 62 35 4D

(109) 1B 2A 98 39 4D

1B 2A 62 #...# 57

(6D)

Run-Length Encoded

Tagged Image File Format

Delta Row

?*b1M

?*b2M

?*b3M

Adaptive Compression

Replacement Delta Row

# of Bytes

?*b5M

?*b9M

Transfer Raster Data (by row)

?*b#W[Data]

?*b#V[Data]

Transfer Raster Data (by plane) # of Bytes

1B 2A 98 #...# 56

End Raster Graphics

Old version Preferred

?*rB

?*rC

(b)

(c)

027 042 114 066

027 042 114 067

(98) 1B 2A 72 42

(99) 1B 2A 72 43

(62)

(63)

Raster Height (Source)

Raster Width (Source)

# Raster Rows

?*r#T

?*r#S

(t)

(s)

027 042 114 #...# 084

027 042 114 #...# 083

(116) 1B 2A 72 #...# 54

(115) 1B 2A 72 #...# 53

(74)

(73)

# Pixels of the Specified

Resolution

Raster Height (Destination)

Raster Width (Destination)

Scale Algorithm

# of Decipoints

?*t#H

?*t#V

?*t0K

?*t1K

(h)

(v)

(k)

027 042 116 #...# 072

027 042 116 #...# 086

027 042 116 048 075

027 042 116 049 075

(104) 1B 2A 74 #...# 48

(118) 1B 2A 74 #...# 56

(107) 1B 2A 74 30 4B

(107) 1B 2A 74 31 4B

(68)

(76)

(6B)

# of Decipoints

Source with light background

Source with dark background

A-12 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

THE PRINT MODEL

Imaging

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

Select Current Pattern

Solid Black (default)

Solid White

?*v0T

?*v1T

?*v2T

?*v3T

(t)

027 042 118 048 084

(116) 1B 2A 76 30 54

(74)

027 042 118 049 084

027 042 118 050 084

027 042 118 051 084

(116) 1B 2A 76 31 54

(116) 1B 2A 76 32 54

(116) 1B 2A 76 33 54

HP-defined Shading Pattern

HP-defined

Cross-hatched Pattern

User-defined Pattern

Transparent Opaque

?*v4T

(t)

027 042 118 052 084

(116) 1B 2A 76 34 54

(74)

Source Transparency code

Pattern Transparency Mode

?*v0N

?*v1N

(n)

027 042 118 048 078

027 042 118 049 078

(110) 1B 2A 76 30 4E

(110) 1B 2A 76 31 4E

(6E)

Transparent Opaque

?*v0O

?*v1O

(o)

027 042 118 048 079

027 042 118 049 079

(111) 1B 2A 76 30 4F

(111) 1B 2A 76 31 4F

(6F)

Logical Operation

Pixel Placement

# = ROP3 input value

Grid Intersection

Pixel Placement

?*l#O

?*v0R

?*v1R

(o)

(r)

027 042 108 #...# 079

027 042 108 048 082

027 042 118 049 082

(111) 1B 2A 6C #...# 4F

(114) 1B 2A 6C 30 52

(114) 1B 2A 76 31 52

(6F)

(72)

Rectangle Dimensions

Rectangle Width (Horizontal

Size)

# of dots

?*c#A

(a)

027 042 099 #...# 065

(97) 1B 2A 63 #...# 41

(61)

# of decipoints

# of dots

?*c#H

?*c#B

(h)

(b)

027 042 099 #...# 072

027 042 099 #...# 066

(104) 1B 2A 63 #...# 48

(98) 1B 2A 63 # ... # 42

(68)

(62)

Rectangle Height (Vertical

Size)

# of decipoints

?*c#V

(v)

027 042 099 #...# 086

(118) 1B 2A 63 #...# 56

(76)

Printer Commands A-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

Rectangular Area Fill

Fill Rectangular Area

Solid Black

?*c0P

?*c1P

?*c2P

?*c3P

?*c4P

?*c5P

?*c#G

(p)

(g)

027 042 099 048 080

(112) 1B 2A 63 30 50

(70)

(67)

Erase (solid white fill)

Shaded Fill

027 042 099 049 080

027 042 099 050 080

027 042 099 051 080

027 042 099 052 080

027 042 099 053 080

027 042 099 #...# 071

(112) 1B 2A 63 31 50

(112) 1B 2A 63 32 50

(112) 1B 2A 63 33 50

(112) 1B 2A 63 34 50

(112) 1B 2A 63 35 50

(103) 1B 2A 63 #...# 47

Cross-hatched Fill

User-defined

Current Pattern

Pattern ID

Shading

% of Shading or Type of

Pattern or User Pattern ID

2% Gray

?*c2G

(g)

027 042 099 050 071

(103) 1B 2A 63 32 47

(67)

10% Gray

?*c10G

?*c15G

?*c30G

?*c45G

?*c70G

?*c90G

?*c100G

?*c1G

027 042 099 049 048 071

027 042 099 049 053 071

027 042 099 051 048 071

027 042 099 052 053 071

027 042 099 055 048 071

027 042 099 057 048 071

(103) 1B 2A 63 31 30 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 31 35 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 33 30 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 34 35 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 37 30 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 39 30 47

15% Gray

30% Gray

45% Gray

70% Gray

90% Gray

100% Gray

1 Horiz. Line

2 Vert. Lines

3 Diagonal Lines

4 Diagonal Lines

5 Square Grid

6 Diagonal Grid

027 042 099 049 048 048 071 (103) 1B 2A 63 31 30 30 47

Pattern

027 042 099 049 071

027 042 099 050 071

027 042 099 051 071

027 042 099 052 071

027 042 099 053 071

027 042 099 054 071

(103) 1B 2A 63 31 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 32 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 33 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 34 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 35 47

(103) 1B 2A 63 36 47

?*c2G

?*c3G

?*c4G

?*c5G

?*c6G

A-14 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

USER DEFINED PATTERN / MANAGEMENT CREATION

Define (Download) Pattern

User-defined Pattern Control

# of bytes

?*c#W[Data]

?*c0Q

027 042 099 #...# 087

027 042 099 048 081

027 042 099 049 081

027 042 099 050 081

027 042 099 052 081

027 042 099 053 081

027 042 112 048 082

027 042 112 049 082

1B 2A 63 #...# 57

Delete all patterns

(q)

(r)

(113) 1B 2A 63 030 51

(71)

(72)

Delete all temporary patterns ?*c1Q

(113) 1B 2A 63 031 51

(113) 1B 2A 63 032 51

(113) 1B 2A 63 034 51

(113) 1B 2A 63 035 51

(114) 1B 2A 70 30 52

(114) 1B 2A 70 31 52

Delete current pattern

Make pattern temporary

Make pattern permanent

Rotate with orientation

Follow physical page

?*c2Q

?*c4Q

?*c5Q

?*p0R

?*p1R

Set Pattern Reference

Point

MACROS

Macro ID

Macro ID #

?&f#Y

?&f0X

?&f1X

?&f2X

?&f3X

?&f4X

?&f5X

?&f6X

?&f7X

?&f8X

?&f9X

?&f10X

(y)

(x)

027 038 102 #...# 089

027 038 102 048 088

027 038 102 049 088

027 038 102 050 088

027 038 102 051 088

027 038 102 052 088

027 038 102 053 088

027 038 102 054 088

027 038 102 055 088

027 038 102 056 088

027 038 102 057 088

027 038 102 049 048 088

(121) 1B 26 66 #...# 59

(120) 1B 26 66 30 58

(120) 1B 26 66 31 58

(120) 1B 26 66 32 58

(120) 1B 26 66 33 58

(120) 1B 26 66 34 58

(120) 1B 26 66 35 58

(120) 1B 26 66 36 58

(120) 1B 26 66 37 58

(120) 1B 26 66 38 58

(120) 1B 26 66 39 58

(120) 1B 26 66 31 30 58

(79)

(78)

Macro Control

Start Macro Def.

Stop Macro Def.

Execute Macro

Call Macro

Enable Overlay

Disable Overlay

Delete Macros

Delete All Temp. Macros

Delete Macro ID

Make Temporary

Make Permanent

Printer Commands A-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

(116) 1B 2A 73 30 54

STATUS READBACK

Set Status Readback Location Type Invalid Location

?*s0T

?*s1T

?*s2T

?*s3T

?*s4T

?*s5T

?*s7T

?*s0U

?*s1U

?*s2U

?*s3U

?*s4U

?*s0I

(t)

(u)

(i)

(f)

027 042 115 048 084

027 042 115 049 084

027 042 115 050 084

027 042 115 051 084

027 042 115 052 084

027 042 115 053 084

027 042 115 055 084

027 042 115 048 085

027 042 115 049 085

027 042 115 050 085

027 042 115 051 085

027 042 115 052 085

027 042 115 048 073

027 042 115 049 073

027 042 115 050 073

027 042 115 051 073

027 042 115 052 073

027 038 114 048 070

027 038 114 049 070

(74)

(75)

(69)

(66)

(6D)

(78)

Currently Selected

All Locations

Internal

(116) 1B 2A 73 31 54

(116) 1B 2A 73 32 54

(116) 1B 2A 73 33 54

(116) 1B 2A 73 34 54

(116) 1B 2A 73 35 54

(116) 1B 2A 73 37 54

(117) 1B 2A 73 30 55

(117) 1B 2A 73 31 55

(117) 1B 2A 73 32 55

(117) 1B 2A 73 33 55

(117) 1B 2A 73 34 55

(105) 1B 2A 73 30 49

(105) 1B 2A 73 31 49

(105) 1B 2A 73 32 49

(105) 1B 2A 73 33 49

(105) 1B 2A 73 34 49

(120) 1B 26 72 30 46

(120) 1B 26 72 31 46

(109) 1B 2A 73 31 4D

(120) 1B 2A 73 #...# 58

Downloaded

Cartridge

User-installed ROM (SIMMs)

Set Status Readback Location Unit All entities of the Location Type

Entity 1 or Temporary

Entity 2 or Permanent

Entity 3

Entity 4

Inquire Status Readback Entity

Font

Macro

?*s1I

User-defined Pattern

Symbol Set

?*s2I

?*s3I

Font Extended

Flush All Complete Pages

Flush All Page Data

—

?*s4I

Flush All Pages

?&r0F

?&r1F

?*s1M

?*s#X

Free Memory Space

Echo

(m) 027 042 115 049 077

# = Echo value (-32767 to 32767)

(x)

027 042 115 #...# 088

PROGRAMMING HINTS

End-of-Line Wrap

Display Functions

Enabled

Disabled

?&s0C

?&s1C

(c)

027 038 115 048 067

027 038 115 049 067

027 089

(99) 1B 26 73 30 43

(99) 1B 26 73 31 43

1B 59

(63)

(c)

OFF

027 090

1B 5A

A-16 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

PCL VECTOR GRAPHICS SWITCHING/SET-UP PICTURE FRAME

Enter PCL Mode

Use previous PCL cursor

position

?%0A

?%1A

?%0B

?%1B

027 037 048 65

027 037 049 65

027 037 048 066

027 037 049 066

1B 25 30 41

1B 25 31 41

1B 25 30 42

1B 25 31 42

Use current HP-GL/2pen

position for cursor position

Enter HP-GL/2 Mode

Use previous HP-GL/2 pen

position

Use current PCL cursor

position

Stand-alone plotter mode

?%–1B

?%2B

027 037 045 049 066

027 037 050 066

1B 25 2D 31 42

1B 25 32 42

Current PCL

coordinate system/old HP-GL

pen position

Current PCL coordinate

system/current PCL CAP

?%3B

027 037 051 066

1B 25 33 42

HP-GL/2 Plot Horzontal Size

HP-GL/2 Plot Vertical Size

Horizontal size in inches

Vertical size in inches

?*c#K

?*c#L

?*c0T

(k)

(l)

(t)

027 042 099 #...# 075

027 042 099 #...# 076

027 042 099 048 084

(107) 1B 2A 63 # ... # 4B

(6B)

(6C)

(74)

(108) 1B 2A 63 #...# 4C

(116) 1B 2A 63 30 54

Set Picture Frame Anchor

Point

Set anchor point to cursor

position

Picture Frame Horizontal Size Decipoints

?*c#X

?*c#Y

(x)

(y)

027 042 099 #...# 088

027 042 099 #...# 089

(120) 1B 2A 63 #...# 58

(121) 1B 2A 63 #...# 59

(78)

(79)

Picture Frame Vertical Size

Enter PCL Mode

Decipoints

DUAL CONTEXT EXTENSIONS

?%#A

0 - Retain previous

PCL cursor position

1 - Use current

HP-GL/2 pen

position

Reset

None

Primary Font

Secondary Font

Font_ID

Scalable Or

Bitmapped Fonts

0 - Scalable

fonts only

1 - Bitmapped

fonts allowed

Printer Commands A-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-1. HP PCL 5 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

PARAMETER

COMMAND

DECIMAL VALUE

HEXADECIMAL VALUE

COLOR COMMANDS

?*v#I

Assign Color Index

Index Number

(i) 027 042 118 #...# 073

(a) 027 042 118 #...# 065

(b) 027 042 118 #...# 066

027 042 108 #...# 087

(105) 1B 2A 76 #...# 49

(69)

(61)

(62)

(63)

Color Component One

Color Component Two

Color Component Three

Color Lookup Tables

Configure Image Data

Download Dither Matrix

Foreground Color

1st Component

2nd Component

3rd Component

# of Bytes

?*v#A

(97) 1B 2A 76 #...# 41

(98) 1B 2A 76 #...# 42

(99) 1B 2A 76 #...# 43

1B 2A 6C #...# 57

?*v#B

?*v#C

?*l#W[Data]

?*v#W[Data]

?*v#I

# of Bytes

027 042 118 #...# 087

1B 2A 76 #...# 57

# of Bytes

(i) 027 042 118 #...# 073

(s) 027 042 118 #...# 083

(i) 027 042 116 #...# 073

(m) 027 038 062 048 077

(m) 027 038 062 049 077

(i) 027 038 112 #...# 073

(p) 027 042 112 048 080

(p) 027 042 112 049 080

(j) 027 042 116 048 074

(j) 027 042 116 049 074

(j) 027 042 116 050 074

(j) 027 042 116 051 074

(j) 027 042 116 052 074

(j) 027 042 116 053 074

(j) 027 042 116 054 074

(j) 027 042 116 055 074

(j) 027 042 116 056 074

(j) 027 042 116 057 074

(105) 1B 2A 76 #...# 49

(115) 1B 2A 76 #...# 53

(105) 1B 2A 74 #...# 49

(109) 1B 26 98 30 4D

(109) 1B 26 98 31 4D

(105) 1B 26 70 #...# 49

(99) 1B 26 70 30 43

(99) 1B 26 70 31 43

(99) 1B 26 70 32 43

(99) 1B 26 70 36 43

(112) 1B 2A 70 30 50

(112) 1B 2A 70 31 50

(106) 1B 2A 74 30 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 31 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 32 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 33 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 34 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 35 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 36 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 37 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 38 4A

(106) 1B 2A 74 30 4A

(69)

(73)

(69)

(6D)

(69)

(63)

(70)

(6A)

(73)

Index Number

?*v#S

Gamma Correction

Gamma Number

Mixed Rendering

Gray Equivalent

Palette ID #

?*t#I

Monochrome Print Mode

?&b0M

?&b1M

?&p#I

Palette Control ID

Palette Control

Delete All Palettes in store

Delete All Palettes in stack

Delete Palette (last ID)

Copy Palette

?&p0C

?&p1C

?&p2C

?&p6C

Push/Pop Palette

Render Algorithm

Push Palette

?*p0P

Pop Palette

?*p1P

Continuous tone detail

Snap to primaries

?*t0J

?*t1J

Snap black/white, colors to black ?*t2J

Device best dither

?*t3J

?*t4J

?*t5J

?*t6J

?*t7J

?*t8J

?*t9J

Error diffusion

Monochrome device best dither

Monochrome error diffusion

Cluster ordered dither

Monochrome cluster ordered

User-defined dither

Monochrome user-defined dither ?*t10J

(j) 027 042 116 049 048 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 30 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 049 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 31 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 050 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 32 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 051 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 33 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 052 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 34 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 053 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 35 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 054 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 36 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 055 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 37 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 056 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 38 4A

(j) 027 042 116 049 057 074 (106) 1B 2A 74 31 39 4A

Ordered dither

?*t11J

?*t12J

?*t13J

Monochrome ordered dither

Noise ordered dither

Monochrome noise ordered dither ?*t14J

Continuous tone smooth

Mono. continuous tone detail

Mono. continuous tone smooth

Continuous tone basic

Mono. continuous tone basic

Palette ID #

?*t15J

?*t16J

?*t17J

?*t18J

?*t19J

?&p#S

?*i#W[Data]

?*r–3U

?*r1U

Select Palette

(s) 027 038 112 #...# 083

(115) 1B 26 70 #...# 53

Set Viewing Illumination

Simple Color

# of Bytes

027 042 105 #...# 087

1B 2A 69 #...# 57

3-Plane Device CMY Palette

1-Plane K Palette

(u) 027 042 114 045 051 085 (117) 1B 2A 72 2D 33 55

(75)

(u) 027 042 114 049 085

(u) 027 042 114 051 085

(117) 1B 2A 72 31 55

(117) 1B 2A 72 33 55

3-Plane Device RGB Palette

?*r3U

A-18 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-2. HP-GL/2 Commands

COMMAND

MNEMONIC

PARAMETERS*

PALETTE EXTENSIONS

Color Range

[b_ref_red, w_ref_red, b_ref_grn, w_ref_grn, b_ref_blue, w_ref_blue];

Number of Pens

[n];

Pen Color Assignment

Transparency Mode

[pen [,red, green, blue]];

0 - Off (opaque)

1 - On (transparent)

Screened Vectors

[screen_type[,shading[,index]]]

VECTOR GROUP

Arc Absolute

x_center,y_center,sweep_angle [,chord_angle];

x_increment,y_increment,sweep_angle [,chord_angle];

x_inter,y_inter,x_end,y_end[,chord_angle];

Arc Relative

Absolute Arc Three Point

Bezier Absolute

x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt

x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt

x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt ...

[x1_control_pt, y1_control_pt

x2_control_pt, y2_control_pt

x3_control_pt, y3_control_pt];

Bezier Relative

x1_control_pt_increments,

y1_control_pt_increments,

x2_control_pt_increments,

y2_control_pt_increments,

x3_control_pt_increments,

y3_control_pt_increments ...

[x1_control_pt_increments,

y1_control_pt_increments,

x2_control_pt_increments,

y2_control_pt_increments,

x3_control_pt_increments,

y3_control_pt_increments];

Circle

radius [,chord angle];

Plot Absolute

Plot Relative

Pen Down

[x,y ... [,x,y]];

Pen Up

[x,y ... [,x,y]];

Relative Arc Three Point

Polyline Encoded

x_incr_inter,y_incr_inter,x_incr_end,y_incr_end[,chord angle];

[flag[val]| coord pair ... [flag[val]| coord pair]];

* Parameters in brackets are optional.

Printer Commands A-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-2. HP-GL/2 Commands (continued)

COMMAND

MNEMONIC

POLYGON GROUP

PARAMETERS*

Fill Rectangle Absolute

Fill Rectangle Relative

Edge Rectangle Absolute

Edge Rectangle Relative

Fill Wedge

x_coordinate,y_coordinate;

x_increment,y_increment;

x_coordinate,y_coordinate;

x_increment,y_increment;

radius,start_angle,sweep_angle[,chord_angle];

radius,start_angle,sweep_angle[chord_angle];

polygon_definition;

Edge Wedge

Polygon Mode

Fill Polygon

0- Odd/Even

1 - non-zero winding

Edge Polygon

None

* Parameters in brackets are optional.

A-20 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-2. HP-GL/2 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

MNEMONIC

PARAMETERS*

CHARACTER GROUP

Select Standard Font

Select Alternate Font

Absolute Direction

Relative Direction

Absolute Character Size

Relative Character Size

Character Slant

None

[run,rise];

[width,height];

[tangent_of_angle];

[width[,height]]

Extra Space

Standard Font Definition

Alternate Font Definition

Character Fill Mode

Label Origin

[kind,value ... [,kind,value]];

[fill_mode[,edge_pen]];

[position];

Label

[char ... [char]]1bterm

[1bterm[,mode]];

[spaces,lines];

Define Label Terminator

Character Plot

Transparent Data

Define Variable Text Path

[mode];

[path[,line]];

LINE AND FILL ATTRIBUTES GROUP

Line Type

[line_type[,pattern_length[,mode]]];

Line Attributes

Pen Width

[kind,value ... [,kind,value]];

[width[,pen]];

Pen Width Unit Selection

Select Pen

[type];

[pen]; (required, 1 for black (recommended) or

0 for white)

Symbol Mode

Fill Type

[char];

[fill_type[,option1[,option2]]];

[x_coordinate,y_coordinate];

Anchor Corner

Raster Fill Definition

[index[,width,height,pen_nbr ... pen_nbr]];

(width and height must be less than 255)

User Defined Line Type

[index[,gap1 ... gapn]];

* Parameters in brackets are optional.

Printer Commands A-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-2. HP-GL/2 Commands (continued)

FUNCTION

MNEMONIC

CONFIGURATION AND STATUS GROUP

PARAMETERS*

Advance Full Page

Scale

[n];

[x1,x2,y1,y2[,type[,left,bottom]]];

[x1,xfactor,y1,yfactor,2];

Input Window

[xLL,yLL,xUR,yUR];

Input P1 and P2

Input Relative P1 And P2

Default Values

Initialize

[p1x,p1y[,p2x,p2y]];

None

[n];

Replot

[n];

Rotate Coordinate System

[angle];

TECHNICAL GRAPHICS EXTENSION

Begin Plot

[kind, value...[,kind, value]];

Chord Tolerance Mode

Download Character

Frame Advance

Media Type

[mode];

[charnum [[,up], x, y...[,up],x,y]];

[type];

Merge Control

[mode [, opcod]];

Output Error

Output Hardclip Limits

Output Identification

Output P1 and P2

Output Status

Pixel Placement

Plot Size

[mode];

[length [,width]];

[quality level]

Quality Level

* Parameters in brackets are optional.

A-22 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table A-3. Control Codes

Function

Symbol

Decimal

Value

Description

Backspace

Move one column left unless at left margin, in

which case no action is taken.

Horizontal Tab

Move to the next horizontal tab stop. The tab

stops are at the left margin, and every eight

columns to the right of the left margin.

Line Feed

Form Feed

Move to the next print line while maintaining

current column position.

Move to the first line at top of the next page while

maintaining current column position.

Carriage Return

Shift Out

Move to the left margin on the current print line.

Select characters that follow from the current

secondary font until receipt of a Shift In.

Shift In

Escape

Space

Select characters that follow from the current

primary font until receipt of a Shift Out.

Indicates the beginning of a special control

sequence (escape sequence).

Move one column to the right unless already at

the right margin, in which case no action is taken.

Printer Commands A-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

A-24 Printer Commands

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Internal Symbol Set Charts

Introduction

This section includes symbol set tables showing character

locations and decimal addresses. Individual tables are

provided for the following symbol sets:

Roman-8

ISO 8859/9 Latin 5

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

Ventura Math¹

Math-8¹

DeskTop

Windows 3.1 Latin 1 “ANSI”

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1

PC-8

Pi Font¹

PC-850

PS Math¹

PS Text

Symbol²

MC Text

Wingdings²

Ventura International

PC-8 D/N

PC 1004

PC 775

Ventura US

Windows Baltic

Legal

ISO 8859/10 Latin 6

Windows 3.0 Latin 1

Microsoft Publishing¹

PC-852

Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats²

PS ITC Zapf Dingbats²

ITC Zapf Dingbats series 100²

ITC Zapf Dingbats series 200²

ITC Zapf Dingbats series 300²

PC-8 Turkish

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

Intellifont only except for HP LaserJet 5, 5M, and 4000 series printers where they are also True-

Type. These math sets are inappropriate in script faces, italic faces, or any unusual weight or

style. MS Publishing and Pi Font may be used with script, italic, or unusual weight styles, since

these sets contain few “limited sensitivity” characters that conflict with the typeface sensitive

characters of that typeface.

Available in one typeface only.

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The gray shaded areas in these tables denote printer

control code areas. Math composite characters are shown

with light-colored shades, and line-draw composite

characters are shown with dark-colored shades. Composite

characters are made by combining individual character

elements into a large character.

The International Organization for Standardization (ISO)

symbol sets and the HP German and HP Spanish symbol

sets are represented by a character substitution table (see

page B-19). The final table, the Roman-8 Character

Conversion table identifies the hexadecimal, decimal, and

octal codes for the Roman-8 symbol set.

Note

To identify the symbol sets that are supported by a printer,

refer to Chapter 3, Internal Typefaces/Fonts and Symbol

Sets,” in this document.

B-2 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

DeskTop (DT)

Roman-8 (R8)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 (E1)

19U

Windows 3.1 Latin 1 (W1)

B-4 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12U

PC-850 Multilingual (PM)

10U

PC-8 Code Page 437 (PC)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12J

MC Text (MC)

10J

PS Text (TS)

B-6 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

11U

PC-8 Danish/Norwegian (PD)

13J

Ventura International (VI)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Legal (LG)

14J

Ventura US (VU)

B-8 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Microsoft Publishing (PG)

Windows 3.0 Latin 1 (WO)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PC-Turkish (PT)

17U

PC-852 Latin 2 (PE)

B-10 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Windows 3.1 Latin 2 (WE)

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 (E2)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Windows 3.1 Latin (WT)

ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 (E5)

B-12 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PC-1004, Code Page 1004 (PU)

26U

PC-775, Code Page 775 (PV)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

19L

Windows Baltic (WL)

ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 (E6)

B-14 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Math-8 (M8)

Ventura Math (VM)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PS Math (MS)

15U

Pi Font (PI)

B-16 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

579L

Wingdings Font (L$)

19M

Symbol Font (AS)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

10L

PS ITC Zapf Dingbats (DS)

Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats (DV)

B-18 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

12L

ITC Zapf Dingbats series 200 (D2)

11L

ITC Zapf Dingbats series 100 (D1)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

13L

ITC Zapf Dingbats series 300 (D3)

B-20 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ISO Substitution

Table

This table provides a quick reference for the values of

special characters contained in ISO (International

Organization of Standardization) symbol sets. ISO symbol

sets contain the same characters as the ASCII symbol set,

except for the character positions listed in this table. For

example, in the ISO 4 (United Kingdom) symbol set, the

British pound sign replaces the number sign used in

decimal position 35 of the ASCII symbol set.

Table B-1. ISO Substitution Characters

* These symbol sets are becoming obsolete and are not recommended for future use and are not present on the HP LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si,

4SiMx, 4L, 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4000 series, 5, 5M, 5P, 5L, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier, 6L, 6P, 6MP,

Color LaserJet, Color LaserJet 5, 5M, and DeskJet 1200C, 1600C printers.

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-21

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Conversion Table

Table B-2 gives the hexadecimal, decimal, and octal

equivalent of each character in the Roman-8 symbol set.

Use this table when your software requires hexadecimal,

decimal, or octal values in place of your printer command

characters.

This conversion table begins on the following page.

B-22 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-23

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)

B-24 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-25

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)

B-26 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-27

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)

B-28 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table B-2. Roman-8 Character Conversion (continued)

Internal Symbol Set Charts B-29

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

B-30 Internal Symbol Set Charts

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Introduction

The symbol set IDs in Table C-1 are used to select symbol

sets using PCL commands. Kind1 values are used to select

symbol sets using HP-GL/2 commands. The values under

Kind1 are also used in the Font Descriptor (header) symbol

set field (bytes 14/15, described in Chapter 11, Font

Creation of the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical Reference

Manual). Table C-2 identifies the Typeface Family values

for the various type foundries. Table C-3 identifies all the

currently assigned typeface base values.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Note

The HP-GL/2 Kind1 value can be calculated from the sym-

bol set ID. The Kind1 value is the same value used for the

Symbol Set value field in the Font Header (refer to Chapter

11, Symbol Set of the PCL 5 Printer Language Technical

Reference Manual). The Kind1 value is computed by taking

the value of the value field for the symbol set, multiplying it

by 32, adding the decimal (ASCII) value of the termination

character (the symbol set ID character value) of the escape

sequence, and subtracting 64.

Font Descriptor Symbol Set Value =

(Escape Sequence Value Field Value * 32)

(Decimal Value of Escape Sequence

Termination Character - 64).

For example, to calculate the Kind1 value for the symbol

set 19M (M = ASCII 77):

Symbol set 19M = (19*32) + (77 -64) = 621

C-2 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-1. Symbol Set Values

Symbol Set Name¹

Symbol

Set ID

Kind1

Value²

Symbol Set Name¹

Symbol

Set ID

Kind1

Value²

GW-3212

18C

597

Line Draw-7

ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian

Devanagari

HP Block Characters

Tax Line Draw

Line Draw-8

ISO 4: United Kingdom

Windows 3.1 Latin 2

ISO 69: French

ISO 21: German

Greek-8

268

300

332

364

396

428

620

652

684

716

748

780

1004

1036

1068

1100

1132

1164

18540

293

Ventura ITC Zapf Dingbats³

PS ITC Zapf Dingbats

ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 100

ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 200

ITC Zapf Dingbats Series 300

Windows Baltic

Carta

10L

11L

12L

13L

19L

20L

21L

22L

23L

24L

31L

32L

33L

34L

35L

36L

579L

10G

12G

15H

263

295

327

391

Windows 3.1 Latin/Greek

PC-851 Latin/Greek

PC-8 Latin/Greek

Hebrew-7

Ornaments

ISO 8859/8 Latin/Hebrew

Hebrew-8

232

264

488

Universal News & Commercial Pi

Chess

PC-862 Latin/Hebrew

ISO 15: Italian

Astrology 1

Pi Set #1

Microsoft Publishing

DeskTop

202

234

266

298

330

362

394

426

458

522

554

586

618

682

714

746

267

299

Pi Set #2

Pi Set #3

Document

Pi Set #4

PC-1004

Pi Set #5

PS Text

10J

11J

12J

13J

14J

16J

17J

18J

19J

21J

22J

23J

Pi Set #6

PS ISO Latin1

Wingdings

MC Text

Math-7

Ventura International³

Ventura US³

Tech-7

PS Math

Ventura Math³

173

205

269

333

365

397

429

621

Swash Characters

Small Caps & Old Style Figures

Old Style Figures

Fractions

Math-8

Universal Greek & Math Pi

TeX Math Extension

TeX Math Symbol

TeX Math Italic

Symbol

10M

11M

12M

13M

19M

Lining Figures

Small Caps and Lining Figures

Alternate Caps

Kana-8 (J IS 210)

Korean-8

ISO 8859/1 Latin 1

ISO 8859/2 Latin 2

Contact your local software vendor for information regarding additional symbol set support.

This value is also used for the Encoded Symbol Set Designator field in the user-defined symbol set descriptor, and for the Symbol Set field

in the font headers.

Not recommended for future use. These symbol sets are of limited usage and are being discontinued.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-3

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-1. Symbol Set Values (continued)

Symbol Set Name¹

Symbol

Set ID

Kind1

Value²

Symbol Set Name¹

Symbol

Set ID

Kind1

Value²

ISO 8859/3 Latin 3

10N

11N

12N

10O

110

PC-8 Turkish

308

ISO 8859/4 Latin 4

ISO 8859/9 Latin 5

ISO 8859/10 Latin 6

ISO 8859/5 Latin/Cyrillic

ISO 8859/6 Latin/Arabic

ISO 8859/7 Latin/Greek

OCR-A

142

174

206

334

366

398

Teletex

10T

340

ISO 6: ASCII

Legal

HPL

181

245

277

309

341

373

405

501

533

565

629

661

693

757

821

853

278

310

342

OEM-1

Roman-8

Windows 3.0 Latin 1

PC-8, Code Page 437

PC-8 D/N, Danish/Norwegian

PC-850, Multilingual

Pi Font

OCR-B

10U

11U

12U

15U

16U

17U

19U

20U

21U

23U

25U

26U

OCR-M

MICR (E13B)

335

Typewriter Paired APL

Bit Paired APL

Expert

PC-857

10P

11P

12P

336

368

400

PC-852, Latin 2

Windows 3.1 Latin 1

PC-860 Portugal

Alternate

Fraktur

Reserved for Specials

Cyrillic ASCII (8859/5-1986)

Cyrillic

17+32x PC-861 Iceland

PC-863 Canada-French

PC-865 Norway

PC Cyrillic

114

306

PC-775

Windows 3.1 Latin/Cyrillic

ISO 11: Swedish

ISO 17: Spanish³

HP European Spanish

HP Latin Spanish

HP-GL Download

HP-GL Drafting

HP-GL Special Symbols

Sonata

Arabic-8

Windows 3.1 Latin/Arabic

Code Page 864 Latin/Arabic

3 of 9 Barcode

10V

243

275

531

563

595

659

Industrial 2 of 5 Barcode

Matrix 2 of 5 Barcode

Interleaved 2 of 5 Barcode

CODABAR Barcode

MSI/Plessey Barcode

Code 11 Barcode

16S

17S

18S

20S

153

185

217

249

281

473

505

Thai-8

TISI 620-2533 (Thai)

Windows 3.1 Latin 5

Turkish-8

UPC/EAN Barcode

MICR (CMC-7)

180

276

14Y

15Y

USPS ZIP

Contact your local software vendor for information regarding additional symbol set support.

This value is also used for the Encoded Symbol Set Designator field in the user-defined symbol set descriptor and for the Symbol Set field

in the font headers.

These symbol sets are becoming obsolete and are not recommended for future use and are not present on the HP LaserJet 4, 4M, 4Si,

4SiMx, 4L, 4ML, 4P, 4MP, 4PJ, 4LJ Pro, 4LC, 4 Plus, 4M Plus, 4V, 4MV, 4000 series, 5, 5M, 5P, 5L, 5Si, 5SiMx, 5Si Mopier, 6L, 6P, 6MP,

Color LaserJet, and DeskJet 1200C, 1600C printers.

C-4 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-1. Symbol Set Values (continued)

Symbol Set Name¹

Symbol

Set ID

Kind1

Value²

Symbol Set Name¹

Symbol

Set ID

Kind1

Value²

Obsolete Symbol Sets³

Math-7 (same as 0M)

Line Draw-7 (same as 0L)

HP Large Characters

ISO 61: Norwegian Version 2

Roman Extension

Obsolete Symbol Sets³

ISO 57: Chinese

HP Spanish

ISO 10: Swedish

115

147

179

211

ISO 16: Portuguese

ISO 84: Portuguese

ISO 85: Spanish

ISO 25: French

HP German

ISO 2: International Reference

Arabic (McKay’s version)

ISO 14: J IS ASCII

ISO 13: Katakana

Table C-2 represents the typeface family values assigned to

type foundries. This value, plus the typeface base value (see

Table C-3), produces the numeric code needed to access the

typeface.

Table C-2. Typeface Family Values

Vendor Name

Typeface Vendor Value

AGFA

4096

8192

Bitstream Inc.

Linotype Company

Monotype Corporation

Adobe Systems

12288

16384

20480

28672

Bigelow & Holmes

Examples:

CG Times from Agfa = 5 + 4096 = 4101.

801 from Bitstream Inc. = 5 + 8192 = 8197

Univers from Agfa = 52 + 4096 = 4148.

Times New Roman from Monotype = 517 + 16384 = 16901

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values

Value

Typeface Family¹

Value

Typeface Family¹

Line Printer

Elite

Brush (italic)

Stop

Courier

Blippo (black)

Helvetica

Times Roman

Letter Gothic

Script

Tea Chest (condensed)

Hobo

Windsor

Peignot

Prestige

Baskerville

Trade Gothic

Pemai (Thai)

CG Trade

Caslon 540 & No. 3

Caslon Antique (contour)

Caslon Open Face (inline)

Orator

Goudy Old Style

ITC Zapf Chancery

Clarendon

Presentation

Serifa

Futura

ITC Zapf Dingbats

Cooper

Greek Futura

Palatino

ITC Bookman

Noparat (Thai)

Stick

ITC Souvenir

ITC Souvenir Greek

Optima

HP-GL Drafting

HP-GL Spline

Gill Sans

Safeer (Arabic)

Komain (Thai)

Greek Oracle

Unesco (Thai)

Univers

ITC Garamond

Coronet (italic)

Chevalier (bold expanded pattern 0)

Broadway

Bodoni

Poster Bodoni (black)

Greek Apla

Century Schoolbook

Greek & Math Serif

University Roman

ITC Korinna

Rockwell

Melior

ITC Tiffany

ITC Clearface

Amelia

Naskh

Cloister Black

ITC Galliard

Park Avenue (italic)

Falstaff (black)

Handel Gothic

Dom Casual

ITC Avant Garde Gothic

Tom (Thai)

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

C-6 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

Typeface Family¹

Value

Typeface Family¹

ITC Benguiat

Kaufmann

ITC Cheltenham

Century Expanded

Franklin Gothic

Paetai (Thai)

U-Thong (Thai)

ITC Bolt (extended)

ITC Machine (condensed)

Revue

Plantin

101

102

103

104

105

106

107

108

109

110

111

112

113

114

115

116

117

118

119

120

121

122

123

124

125

126

127

Garamond (Stempel)

Garth Graphic

ITC Ronda

Trump Mediaeval

Futura Black

ITC American Typewriter

Antique Olive

Candy Bits (patterned)

OCR-A

Greek Antique Olive

Uncial

Cochin

Englische Schreibschrift (italic)

Mister Earl (condensed)

Flash (italic)

ITC Bauhaus

Century Old Style

ITC Eras

Woodstock

Friz Quadrata (ITC)

ITC Lubalin Graph

Eurostile

Gothic (numbered)

Stencil (ATF)

OCR-B

Intanon (Thai)

Greek Microstyle

Mincho (J apanese)

Myoungjo (Korean)

HanYang Batang Proportional (Korean)

ITC Serif Gothic

Saemmul (Korea)

Sammul (Korea)

Snell Roundhand

Pilgy (Korean)

Souvenir Gothic

Stymie

Akzidenz-Grotesk

Black White (patterned, outline, inline)

Logos

Shannon

ITC Stone Informal

ITC Stone Sans

ITC Stone Serif

Schneidler Mediaeval

ITC Symbol

ITC Weidemann

Copperplate Gothic (display)

Trajan

Bernhard Modern

Excelsior

Concorde

J anson Text

Gando Ronde Script

Ondine

Linotype Centennial

Life

EACT (Thai)

Minister

P. T. Barnum

New Century Schoolbook

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-7

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

152

153

154

155

156

157

158

159

160

161

162

163

164

165

166

167

168

169

170

171

172

173

174

175

Typeface Family¹

Maru Gosikku (round gothic J apan)

Gulrim (Korean)

HanYang Gulrim Proportional (Korean)

Gosikku (Kaku, gothic J apan)

Gothic (J apan, Fixed Pitch)

HanYang Dotum Proportional (Korean)

Socho

Value

176

177

178

179

180

181

182

183

184

185

186

187

188

189

190

191

192

193

194

195

196

197

198

199

200

201

202

203

204

205

206

207

208

209

Typeface Family¹

ITC Berkeley Oldstyle

Frutiger

Candida

Folio

Corona

ITC Kabel

Zeppelin (inline)

Garamond No. 3

Sabon

Kyokasho (text book)

Kaisho

Traditional Arabic Script

Arabic News

ITC Novarese

Weiss

Post Antiqua

Hiroshige

Aerospace Pi

French Script

Meridien

Devanagari (Hindi)

Maritime Pi

Mistral

Krishna (Gujarati)

Bits Pic Pi

Aster

Caledonia

Ranjit (Gurmukhi)

Keycap Pi

Nuptial Script

Lucida

Raj Raja (Tamil)

Tieman

Song (China)

Adobe Wood Series 1

Memphis

Gyosho

David

Lucida Sans

Syntax

Nork

Ousbouh

Utopia

Koufi

Berthold Walbaum Buch

Minion

Italia (ITC)

Hadassah

Marigold

Bembo

ITC Tiepolo

Versailles

Sharif

Aachen

ITC Leawood

ITC Caslon No. 224

ITC Cushing

ITC Fenice

ITC Usherwood

ITC Benguiat Gothic

Malik

Americana

Arnold Boecklin

Copperplate Gothic (text)

Belwe

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

C-8 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

210

211

212

213

214

215

216

217

218

219

220

221

222

223

224

225

226

227

228

229

230

231

232

233

234

235

Typeface Family¹

Value

236

237

238

239

240

241

242

243

244

245

246

247

248

249

250

251

252

253

254

256

257

258

259

Typeface Family¹

Spartan

Cataneo

ITC Ozwald (fatface)

Neuzeit Grotesk

PMN Caecilia

ITC Busorama

Agfa Wile Roman

ITC Zapf International

Poppl-Pontifex

ITC Quay Sans

Arial

Communication 3

Wittenberger Fraktur

Communication 6

Modern

PL Modern

Games & Sports 1

Artistik

Games & Sports 2

Flintstones

Fairfield

Games & Sports 3

SnowCap

ITC Zapf Book

Lucida Casual

Linotype Technical Pi 1 & 2

Graphite

Games & Sports 4

Bedrock

Holidays 1

Linotype Textil Pi 1 & 2

Poetica

Star Fleet

Industry & Engineering 1

Star Trek Film

Industry & Engineering 2

Star Trek

Century Schoolbook Monospace

Berliner Grotesk

Christiana

Comenius-Antiqua

Delta

Transportation 1

Hei (China)

Italian Old Style

Zingo

Star Trek Pi

Transportation 2

ITC Mendoza

Boton

Octavian

Borders & Ornaments 1

Footlight

J aeger Daily News

ITC Officina Serif

ITC Officina Sans

Goudy Modern

Scotch Roman

Temporary-Only Font

Bar Codes

Borders & Ornaments 4

Apollo

Borders & Ornaments 5

Bremen

Borders & Ornaments 6

Oranda

Communication 1

Nubian

Hadriano

J oanna

Communication 2

Onyx

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

260

261

262

263

264

265

266

267

268

269

270

271

272

273

274

275

276

277

278

279

280

281

282

283

284

285

286

Typeface Family¹

Value

287

288

289

290

291

292

293

294

295

296

297

298

299

300

301

302

303

304

305

306

307

308

309

310

311

312

313

314

315

316

317

Typeface Family¹

Cyrillic Helvetica

Avenir

Greek Helvetica

East Asian Helvetica

Cyrillic Times

Greek Times

Lucia

Tekton

Charme

ITC Flora

Basilica

Auriol

East Asian Times

ITC Quorum

Engravers’ Old English

Kennerley

Kuenstler Script

ITC New Baskerville

Berling

Adobe Caslon

Albertus

News Gothic

Critter

New Aurora Grotesque

TBG Omnia

Linotype Holiday Pi 1, 2, & 3

Medici Script

Aurora

Glypha

Tempo

Umbra (open shadow)

American Text

Pasquale

Carta

Adobe Symbol

Insignia

ITC Elan

Perpetua

Monotype Goudy Sans

Lutheresche Fraktur

Universal News & Commercial Pi

Thunderbird (extra condensed)

ITC Honda (black)

Shelley

Raleigh

Romic

Formata

Cyrillic Univers

Chuan Pim (like Univers)

Narkis Tam (like Univers)

Greek Univers II

Bauer Bodoni

Industria

Mr. Big

Macbeth

Universal Greek & Math Pi

ITC Century

Cutout

Vineta

Decoration Pi

Letraset Bramley

Isabella

TBG Duc de Berry

Times Europa

ITC J amille

Cascade Script

VAG Rounded

Russell Square

Liberty

Flyer

Wedding Text

Carolina

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

C-10 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

318

319

320

321

322

323

324

325

326

327

328

329

330

331

332

333

334

335

336

337

338

339

340

341

342

343

344

345

346

347

348

349

350

Typeface Family¹

Value

351

352

353

357

358

359

360

361

362

363

364

365

366

367

368

369

370

371

372

373

374

375

376

377

378

379

Typeface Family¹

ITC Esprit

Clairvaux

Raphael

Simplified Arabic

Maximus

ITC Slimbach

Berthold Garamond

Rad

ITC Franklin Gothic

Murray Hill

Baker Signet

Mythos

Land Pi

Oxford (italic)

Kino (bold condensed)

Looney Tunes

E13B MICR

Gambling Pi

San Marco

Typo Roman

Engravers Text (inline)

New Berolina (italic)

Orbit-B

Imperial

CMC-7 MICR

Charlemagne

Present Script

Repro Script (italic)

Matura (bold)

Baskerville No. 2

Engravers’ Roman

VGC Egyptian 505

TBG Herculanum

Clearface Gothic

Studz

McCollough

ITC Isadora

Giddyup

Audio Pi

Letraset Crillee

Agfa Nadianne

Compliment

ITC Giovanni

Neuzeit S

Erbar

Border Pi 1515-9

Toolbox

Parisian

Nofret

Bundesbahn Pi

Quake

City

Old Style 7

Bell Centennial

Lydian

Chemical Pi

Neuland (solid & inline)

Newton Inline

Warning Pi

Monotype Ellington

Impressum

Reporter No. 2

Freestyle Script

Serpentine

Lithos

Harry

Alternate Gothic (numbered)

Figaro

Formal Script

Holland Title

ITC Barcelona

Basilia

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-11

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

380

381

382

383

384

385

386

387

388

389

390

391

392

393

394

395

396

397

398

399

400

401

402

403

404

405

406

407

408

409

410

411

Typeface Family¹

Value

412

413

414

415

416

417

418

419

420

421

422

423

424

425

426

427

428

429

430

431

432

433

434

435

436

437

438

439

440

Typeface Family¹

Cartier

Rotis Sans Serif

Deepdene

Delphin

Parsons

Brighton

Caravan LH Three

Rotis Semisans

Caravan LH Four

Arcadia

Berthold Barmeno

Berthold Colossalis

Berthold Cosmos

ITC Isbell

ITC Veljovik

Armenian Aramian

Armenian Barz

Helvetica Rounded

Olympian

ITC Mixage

Sonata

DIN Engschrift (condensed)

DIN Mittelschrift

Granjon

Badr, or Bayaan II

ITC Newtext

Happening

Guardi

Menue

Impact

Doric

Sassoon Primary

Packard

S’maragd

Pierrot

Baskerville Book

ITC Pacella

Ornaments

Berthold Bodoni Old Face

Schadow

Rusticana

Eccentric

Akzidens Grotesk Buch

Akzidens Grotesk Buch Stencil

Akzidens Grotesk Buch Schulbuch

Bookman

Embassy Script

Greek Florentine Script II

PL Latin Bold

PL Latin Elongated (condensed)

Latin Antique

Latin Wide (extended)

ITC Modern 216

Serlio

Bruce Old Style

Bulmer

Madison

Textype

Primer

Piranesi

Garamond (Simoncini)

Adobe Wood Series 2

Rotis Serif

Imago

Wilke

Cyrillic 22

Caravan LH One

Rotis Semiserif

Caravan LH Two

Adobe Garamond

Seagull

Latin MT

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

C-12 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

441

442

443

444

445

446

447

448

449

450

451

452

453

454

455

456

457

458

459

460

461

462

463

464

465

466

467

468

469

470

Typeface Family¹

Value

471

472

473

474

475

476

477

478

479

480

481

482

483

484

485

486

487

488

489

490

491

492

493

Typeface Family¹

Runic MT

Digital

Moore Computer

Commercial Script

Dominante

Noris Script (italic)

Poppl-Pontifex (B.metrics)

Amigo

Wilhelm Klingspor Gotisch

Trajanus

Pelican (italic)

Visigoth (bold italic)

Letraset Arta

Post Mediaval

Adsans

TSI Caxton

Letraset Caxton

Fette Fraktur

Sapphire (pattern 0)

Saphir (pattern 0)

Rainbow Bass (pattern 0)

European Pi

Ariadne

Calligraphy

Didot

Ashley Script (italic)

Ashley Crawford (bold)

Ashley Inline (inline)

Catull

Banco

Bodoni Antiqua

Sallwey Script

Mathematical Pi

Congress

Cremona

Audrey No. 2

Lo-Type

Cheq

Berthold Walbaum Buch (B.metrics)

Huxley Vertical

Grayda

Madame (patterned with shadow)

Roundy

Animals

Penfield No. 3

Michelangelo

Neo Didot

Ruling Script

Business & Services 1

Sho

Berthold Caslon Buch

Sans No. 1

Business & Services 2

Wiesbaden Swing

Commercial 1

Star Trek Next

Commercial 2

ITC Highlander

Ecology

Torino

Photina

Calligraphiques

Concorde Nova

Franco

Goudy Text

Helios II

Balloon (italic)

Eusebius

General Symbols 1

Kai Medium

Eusebius Open (inline)

General Symbols 2

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-13

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

494

495

496

497

498

499

500

501

502

503

504

505

506

507

508

509

510

511

512

513

514

516

517

518

519

520

521

522

Typeface Family¹

Medical & Pharmaceutical 1

Space

Value

523

524

525

526

527

528

529

530

531

532

533

534

535

536

537

538

539

540

541

542

543

544

545

546

547

548

549

550

551

552

Typeface Family¹

Centaur

Fine Hand

Musical

Linotype Astrology Pi

Sackers Roman

Kompakt (ultra black italic)

Monoline Script (italic)

Othello (bold condensed)

Sackers Classic Roman

Sackers Italian Script (italic)

Musketeer

Special Alphabets 4

Special Alphabets 5

Special Alphabets 6

Inflex

Monotype Old Style

Ming

FangSong

Helinda Rook

Riviera (inline)

Original Script

Poppl-Residenz

Rotation

Citadel Script

Old Fashion Script

ITC Legacy Serif

ITC Legacy Sans

Athenaeum

Bank Gothic

Delphian (inline)

Greeting Monotone

Sackers Antique Roman

Schwabacher

Athenaeum Negative (pattern 0)

Athenaeum Positive (pattern 1)

ITC Anna (condensed)

ITC Beesknees (black)

ITC Studio Script (italic)

ITC Mona Lisa Recut (inline)

ITC Mona Lisa Solid (upright)

Sackers Square Gothic

Sackers English Script

Heritage

Egyptienne (condensed)

Artisan Roman (inline)

Forte (bold italic)

Burin Roman

Burin Sans (light)

Hellenic Wide (extended)

Thompson Quillscript

Kartoon

Classic Roman

Sackers Gothic

AG Old Face

Greek Helios II

Lucian

Times (Ten, New, etc.)

Berthold Script

Della Robbia

Libra

Bernhard Tango (italic)

Castellar (inline)

Else

Brody (bold upright)

Ad Lib (bold)

Choc (black)

Basque (condensed)

Palace Script (italic)

Handle Oldstyle

Roman

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

C-14 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

553

554

555

556

557

558

559

560

561

562

563

565

566

567

568

569

570

571

572

573

574

575

576

577

578

579

580

581

582

583

584

585

Typeface Family¹

Value

585

586

587

588

589

590

591

592

593

594

595

596

597

598

599

600

601

602

603

604

605

606

607

608

609

610

611

Typeface Family¹

Antique Roman

Profil (bold italic inline)

Goudy Catalogue, addt’l Old Style faces

Goudy Handtooled (inline)

Goudy Heavyface (black)

Calligrapher

Lucida Bright

Pi Collection

Imprint

Allegro (bold italic)

Engraver ’s Gothic (text)

Bernhard (bold condensed)

Eckmann (text)

Cloister Open Face (outline)

Davida (text)

Broadpen

Amazone

Klang (italic)

Frank Ruehl

Cloe

Fry’s Baskerville

Metro

Discus

Mandate

Myriad

Star Trek Gen

WTC Our Bodoni

Ideal Schreibschrift

Virile

Bingham Script (text)

Block (bold)

Lucida Blackletter

Lucida Calligraphy

Data 70

ITC Gorilla (text)

ITC Pioneer (outline shadow)

Ruzicka

Compacta (expanded)

Helvetica Inserat (condensed)

Lucida Handwriting

Milestones

Bodoni Campanile

Linotype Modern

Monterey Script (italic)

Playbill (condensed)

Normande

Biffo

Calvert

Wave

Cantoria

Bernhard Fashion (extra light)

Mercurius

Dorchester Script

Grotesque

Stuyvesant (inline)

Impuls (italic)

Pepita

Vectora

Romana (text & bold)

Shotgun

Script Bold

Spectrum

Ehrhardt

Boulevard

ITC Grizzly

Cheltenham

ITC Grouch

De Vinne

ITC Tom’s New Roman

Palette (italic)

London Text (inline)

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-15

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

611

612

613

614

615

616

617

618

619

620

621

622

623

624

625

626

627

628

629

630

631

632

633

634

635

636

637

638

639

640

641

642

Typeface Family¹

Hanseatic (ultrabold condensed)

Bison

Value

643

644

645

646

647

648

649

650

651

652

653

654

655

656

657

658

659

660

661

662

663

664

665

666

667

668

669

670

671

Typeface Family¹

Capone Light

Victorian Silhouette (contour)

Dynamo (extra bold)

Modernistic (inline)

Gallia (inline)

J efferson

Electra

Antique No. 3

Flemish Script (italic)

Hallmark Bodoni

Modern #20

Skjald

Bell Gothic

Gillies Gothic Bold (italic)

Quaint Roman

Westinghouse Gothic

Bloc (outline)

Chic (inline)

Empire (ultra condensed)

Oscar

PL Westerveldt Light (condensed)

PL Davison Americana

TC J asper

Eagle Bold

J oanna Solotype (inline)

Akzidenz-Grotesk (B.metrics)

Koch Antiqua

Poppl-Laudatio

TC Europa Bold

Siena Black (italic)

Yearbook

Mirarae

Horley Old Style

Tango

Koloss (extra bold)

Phenix American (extra condensed)

PL Bernhardt

Pifont Circle Numbers

Pifont OCRA Numbers

Pifont Square Numbers

Pifont Triangle Numbers

Bank Script (italic)

Serlio Dekoration (pi numbers)

Concorde (B.metrics)

J ets

Orlando Caps

PL Barclay Outline (outline)

PL Britannia Bold

PL Fiorello Condensed

Fluidum Bold (italic)

Woodblock (bold)

Sinaloa (pattern 0)

Stratford Extra Bold

Matra (pattern 0)

PL Tower Condensed

Section Bold Condensed

Miehle Condensed

Phyllis

J etsons

Looney Type

Pompeijana

Rusticana (Frutiger)

Notre Dame

Beverly Hills (inline)

Lotus (pattern 0)

Advertisers Gothic Light

Eclipse (pattern 0)

Modernique (extra bold)

Egyptienne F

Post Antiqua (B.metrics)

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

C-16 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

672

673

674

675

676

677

678

679

680

681

682

683

684

685

686

687

688

689

690

691

692

693

694

695

696

697

698

699

700

701

Typeface Family¹

Value

702

703

704

705

706

707

708

709

710

711

712

713

714

715

716

717

718

719

720

721

725

726

727

728

729

730

731

732

733

734

735

736

737

738

739

Typeface Family¹

Quirinus Bold (condensed)

PL West Behemoth Semi Condensed (XBd Cd)

Renault

Diotima

Aldus

Chaplin (italic)

Uncle Sam Stars (pattern 0, shadow)

Uncle Sam Stripes (pattern 1, shadow)

Wildstyle

Forbes Bold

Mobil

Becket

Logan (pattern 0)

Eon Age (pattern 1)

System X3 (pattern 2)

Galaxy Run (pattern 3)

J ukebox (bold condensed)

Marking Numbers Squares

Al Harf Al J adid

Lucida Sans Typewriter

Cartoon Script Roman

Campanula

Odilia

Lino Letter

Henche

Mahlau (condensed)

Aquarias No. 8 (bold)

CG Frontiera

Globe Gothic

Signature

Vivaldi

Codex

Metronome Gothic (bold extra condensed)

Salut (bold)

Lucida Fax

Sans Serif Stencil

Boldface PS

Bellevue

Architect

Title PS

Beton Extra Bold

Metropolis (extra bold, solid & inline)

PL Davison Zip Bold

Neon (Nebiolo)

Hess Neobold

Hollandse Mediaeval

Holland Seminar

CG Cloister

PL Benguiat Frisky

PL Bartuska Trophy Oblique

Cable

Adroit

Claire News

Triplett

PL Brazilia

Accolade

PL Radiant

Claridge

Ritmo Bold (italic)

PL Fiedler Gothic Bold

Egiziano Black

Alpin Gothic

Geometric

Heldustry

Studio

Busorama

PL Futura Maxi

Salto

Solemnis

Fehrle Display

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-17

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

740

741

742

743

744

745

746

747

748

749

750

751

752

753

754

755

756

757

758

759

760

761

762

763

764

765

766

767

768

Typeface Family¹

Value

769

770

771

772

773

774

775

776

777

778

779

780

781

782

783

784

785

786

787

788

789

790

791

792

793

794

795

796

797

798

799

800

801

802

803

Typeface Family¹

Kismet

Kigali Roman

Digi Fraktur

Anglia

Rundfunk Antiqua

Rundfunk Grotesk

Apolline

J iffy

Rosewood

Zebrawood

Alisal

Strider

Pepperwood (condensed)

Copal (solid)

Throhand

Cicero (e should be e-acute)

Antique Condensed Two

Asphalt Black

Avalon

Copal (outline, patterned)

Motter Corpus (extrabold)

Cerigo

Caflisch Script

Brok

Mezz

Citadel

Nueva

Hermes

Penumbra

Lafayette

Sanvito

Narcissus

Viva

Pilsner

Alexa (italic)

Showcard Moderne

Streamline

Balzano

Caliban (condensed italic)

Ex Ponto

Scherzo

J ante Antiqua

Albers Architype

Aubette Architype

Ballmer Architype

Bayer Type Architype

Schwitters Architype

Crane

Neue Hammer Unziale 1

Neue Hammer Unziale 2 (edge)

Galahad

LiShu (China)

Gungse (Korean)

HanYang GungSe Proportional (Korean)

Yuang (Yuan, XiYuang - China)

Miryam

Runa Serif

Comedia Serif

Breadline Normal

Revolution Normal

Virgin Roman Normal

Gararond

Ryadh

Arkona (ital script)

El Greco (ital script)

Aja (ital script)

Poppl-Exquisit (ital script)

Sassafras Roman

Abacus

Classic

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

C-18 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table C-3. Typeface Base Values (continued)

Value

804

805

806

807

808

809

810

811

812

813

814

815

816

817

818

819

820

821

822

823

824

825

826

827

828

829

830

831

832

833

834

835

Typeface Family¹

Value

836

Typeface Family¹

Cupid

Arepo

Alligators

837

Carmela (italic)

Aureus Uncial (upright)

Connach (upright, norm and uncial lc)

Cresci Rotunda (upright)

Donatello (italic, black italic)

Francesca (lombardic, upright & cond)

Lombardic Capitals (upright)

Ludovico Smooth (italic & flourishes)

Ludovico Woodcut (italic & flourishes)

Mantegna (italic)

838

Dorothea (upright)

839

Hrabanus (upright)

840

Lexie’s Animals

841

Mexican Birds

841

Mexican Borders

841

Mexican Symbols

842

Monmouth (upright)

843

Neuhengen (upright)

Ophelia Italic

844

Palatino Rotunda (upright)

Percival (upright)

845

Poggio Bookhand (upright)

Pompeii Capitals (upright)

Ramsey (upright)

846

Wolfdance (italic)

847

Adastra (bold italic inline)

Ampersands

848

Sallando Italic

849

Thalia Italic

Arwen (upright)

850

Trieste (upright)

Blocks (upright, solid filled)

Elegant (inline & outline)

Poetry (solid & inline)

851

Connach Historic

852

Lombardic Caps

853

Ludovico Smooth Flourish

Ludovico Woodcut Flourish

Newton Inline

Sphinx (extrabold, solid & inline)

Tube (upright)

853

854

Searsucker (solid, outline, patterned)

Hindenburg (upright)

855

Lucida Typewriter

930

Akzidenz Grotesk Buch Rounded

Isil Gothic

Informal (black, norm & condensed)

Marquis (upright)

1030

2128

2200

2201

2549

2730

2808

HanYang Batang Fixed Pitch (Korean)

MS Mincho (J apan, Proportional)

HanYang Gulrim Fixed Pitch (Korean)

HanYang Dotum Fixed Pitch (Korean)

MS Gothic (J apan, Proportional)

Ming Light (J apan, Proportional)

Wingdings

Questions

Maximilian (upright, inline)

Minimal (upright thin)

Stalk (upright inline)

Mariposa (family)

Mariposa Sans (family)

Corvallis (upright & italic)

Corvallis Sans (upright & italic)

HanYang GungSe Fixed Pitch (Korean)

These typeface names may be registered trademarks of a third party. Use of these fonts may be conditional upon a license grant from the

owners of the fonts. Hewlett-Packard makes no representation as to the quality or performance of the fonts, and any reference to the fonts

does not grant any license or right to use the fonts.

Symbol Set and Typeface Codes C-19

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

C-20 Symbol Set and Typeface Codes

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

fill type HP-GL/2 5-6

foreground color 2-70

HP-GL/2 mode 2-87

?&b#W 2-7

?*l # R 2-25

job separation 2-2

?*l#O - Logical Operation 2-17

line type HP-GL/2 5-6

logical operation 2-17

MC (merge control) 2-29

mechanical print quality 2-85, 2-89

media destination (output bin) 2-78

media source 2-76

media type 2-85, 2-88

negative motion 2-90

number of copies 2-2

output bin selection 2-2, 2-78

page size 2-2

adaptive compression

IIIP 2-4

adaptive data compression (ADC) 2-4, 5-1

banded images 5-5

image separation 5-5

transmission guidelines 5-4

alphanumeric ID command 2-79

AppleTalk

palette control 2-70

configuration 2-7, 2-71

device type 2-9

PCL job support 2-7

RENAME 2-8, 2-71

type, PostScript 2-8

ZONE 2-71

paper (media) source 2-76

pixel placement 2-25, 2-28

PP (pixel placement) 2-28

print quality 2-89

push/pop palette 2-71

render algorithm 2-71, 2-104

simple color 2-71

arbitrary dither matrix sizes 2-86

assign color index command 2-70

text parsing method 2-33

text path direction 2-34

compression

adaptive compression 2-4

transmission recommendations 5-4

compression methods, memory saving 5-6

configuration command 2-7

base values, typeface 3-12

bitmap fonts, internal 3-2

Configure Image Data (CID) command 2-70

conventions, manual i-iv

corrections 1-5

character

conversion table B-22

downloading 5-6

enhancement segment 2-36, 2-47

enhancements 2-52

text path direction 2-34

CID command 2-70

color

data transmission 5-4

decimal values

character B-22

printer commands A-1

default settings

commands 2-85

components 1, 2, and 3 2-70

foreground 2-70

factory 4-1

HP-GL/2 4-4

lookup tables 2-70

Color LaserJet printer 2-70

command

DeskJet 1200C printer 2-85

DeskJet 1600C printer 2-91

device type, AppleTalk 2-9

dither patterns 2-104

download dither matrix 2-70

downloading characters 5-6

duplex printing 2-1

alphanumeric ID 2-79

assign color index 2-70

change text path direction 2-34

configuration 2-7

end raster graphics 2-2

enter HP-GL/2 mode 2-85

Index-1

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EconoMode 2-61

I/O configuration 2-7

ID values, symbol set C-2

image adapt 5-2

economy mode, 4L 2-11

end raster graphics command 2-2

enter HP-GL/2 mode command 2-85

environment

initialization 2-49

internal fonts 3-1

factory default 4-1

saving 2-10

user default 4-7

internal symbol sets 3-1

mapping B-1